Dps 005

Installation and Maintenance Manual
IM 1125-7
Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: IM 1125
Date: November 2015
Rebel™ Commercial Packaged

Rooftop Systems
Heating and Cooling
Models DPS003 – 028A
R-410A Refrigerant
MicroTech® III Unit Controller
Energy Recovery Wheel
3–6 tons
7–15 tons
Shown with Energy Recovery
16–28 tons
Shown with Energy Recovery
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ECM Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Table of Contents
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Unit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Unit Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Economizer Enthalpy Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Hazard Identification Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 External Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Exhaust Fan Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Installer Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Proof-of-Airflow and Dirty Filter Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Duct High Pressure Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Service Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Convenience Receptacle (Field Powered) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Ventilation Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Convenience Receptacle (Unit Powered) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Overhead Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Roof Curb Assembly and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Rigging and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Operating States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Unit Piping - Condensate Drain Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Mechanical Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Damper Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Cabinet Weather Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Preparing the Unit for Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Installing Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Pre-Start of Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Spring Isolated Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Pre-Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Servicing Control Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Refrigeration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Fan Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DPS 003–015 Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Check, Test and Start Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
DPS 016–028 Ton Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Economizer Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
VFD Compressor Operation – DPS 016–028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Compressor Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Variable Speed Scroll Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Set Up for Optimum Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Optional Modulating Hot Gas Reheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Air Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Modulating Hot Gas Reheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Energy Recovery Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Optional Electric Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Final Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Electric Heater Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Final Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Optional Gas Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Maintaining Control Parameter Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Daikin Tubular Heater Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Gas Furnace Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Performing Service Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Gas Heating Capacity Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Planned Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DPS 003–015 Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Unit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DPS 016–028 Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Periodic Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Start-Up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Servicing Refrigerant Sensors or Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
DPS 003–015 (only) Ignition Control Module for Servicing Optional Electric Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Staged Gas Furnace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Servicing the Compressor Ground Fault Interrupter . . . . . . . . . . . 101
DPS 003–015 (only) Ignition Control Module for
Modulating Gas Furnace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Phase Voltage Monitor (PVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
DPS 003–015 (only) Gas Furnace Ignition and Control Cleaning Option E Coated Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Service and Warranty Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
VB-1200 Trouble Shooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
DPS 016–028 Gas Furnace Ignition Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Scroll Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Optional Hot Water Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 In-Warranty Return Material Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Hot Water Heater Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Warranty Registration Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Optional Energy Recovery Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Quality Assurance Survey Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Appendix – Keypad/Display Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Optional Outdoor Air Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Thermal Dispersion Airflow Measurement Technology . . . . . . . . . . 69
IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS 2 www.DaikinApplied.com

Introduction
Introduction
General Information Unit Nameplate

This manual provides general information about the “A” The unit nameplate is located on the outside of the main
vintage Daikin Rebel Commercial Packaged Rooftop Unit, control box door. It includes the unit model number, serial
model DPS. In addition to an overall description of the unit, number, electrical characteristics, and refrigerant charge.
it includes mechanical and electrical installation procedures,
commissioning procedures, sequence of operation information,
and maintenance instructions.
Hazard Identification Information
The MicroTech® III rooftop unit controller is equipped on DANGER
“A” vintage rooftop units. For a detailed description of the
MicroTech III components, input/output configurations, field Dangers indicate a hazardous situation which will result
wiring options and requirements, and service procedures, in death or serious injury if not avoided.
see OM 1141. For operation and information on using and
programming the MicroTech III unit controller, refer to the
appropriate operation manual (see Table 1). WARNING
For a description of operation and information on using Warnings indicate potentially hazardous situations,
the keypad to view data and set parameters, refer to the which can result in property damage, severe personal
appropriate program-specific operation manual (see Table 1). injury, or death if not avoided.
Table 1: Program Specific Unit Operation Literature

CAUTION
Manual
Rooftop unit control configuration bulletin number Cautions indicate potentially hazardous situations,
BACnet IP Comm Module IM 916 which can result in personal injury or equipment damage
BACnet® Integration IM 917 if not avoided.
LonWorks® Integration IM 918
DPS Unit Controller Discharge
Air Control (VAV or CAV) OM 1141
Space Comfort Control (SCC)
Rebel Quick Start Guide OM 1164
Nomenclature (DPS 003–028)
DPS – 010 – A H H G 4
Daikin Packaged System Line voltage

2 = 208 volt power supply
Nominal capacity
003 = 3 tons 016 = 16 tons
004 = 4 tons 018 = 18 tons
005 = 5 tons 020 = 20 tons
006 = 6 tons 025 = 25 tons Heat medium
007 = 7.5 tons 028 = 28 tons Y = None (cooling only)
010 = 10 tons G = Natural gas heat
012 = 12 tons E = Electric heat
015 = 15 tons W = Hot water heat
Design vintage Unit style

A = Vintage 1 C = Cooling only
H = Heat pump
Cooling efficiency
H = High (exceeds ASHRAE 92) M = Cooling-only microchannel
www.DaikinApplied.com 3 IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS

Mechanical Installation
Installer Responsibilities Service Clearance

CAUTION CAUTION
Sharp edges on sheet metal and fasteners can cause Location. Care should be taken for the installation
personal injury. This equipment must be installed, location to minimize snow drifts on the outdoor coil.
operated, and serviced only by an experienced
installation company and fully trained personnel. Allow service clearances as approximately indicated in Figure
1. Also, Daikin recommends providing a roof walkway to the
The installation of this equipment shall be in accordance rooftop unit as well as along each side of the unit that provides
with the regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and all access to most controls and serviceable components.
applicable codes. It is the responsibility of the installer to Refer to NEC and local for minimum clearances around the
determine and follow the applicable codes. unit and control panel.
Receiving Inspection Ventilation Clearance

When the equipment is received, all items should be carefully Below are minimum ventilation clearance recommendations.
checked against the bill of lading to be sure all crates and The system designer must consider each application and
cartons have been received. If the unit has become dirty provide adequate ventilation. If this is not done, the unit may
during shipment (winter road chemicals are of particular not perform properly.
concern), clean it when received.
All units should be carefully inspected for damage when Unit(s) Surrounded by a Screen or a Fence:
received. Report all shipping damage to the carrier and file a 1. The bottom of the screen or fence should be at least 1 ft.
claim. In most cases, equipment is shipped F.O.B. factory and (305 mm) above the roof surface.
claims for freight damage should be filed by the consignee.
2. The distance between the unit and a screen or fence
Before unloading the unit, check the unit nameplate to make should be as described in Figure 1.
sure the voltage complies with the power supply available.
3. The distance between any two units within a screen or
fence should be at least 120" (3048 mm).
Unit(s) Surrounded by Solid Walls:

1. If there are walls on one or two adjacent sides of the unit,
the walls may be any height. If there are walls on more
than two adjacent sides of the unit, the walls should not
be higher than the unit.
2. The distance between the unit and the wall should be at
least 96" (2438 mm) on all sides of the unit.
3. The distance between any two units within the walls
should be at least 120" (3048 mm).
Do not locate outside air intakes near sources of contaminated air.
If the unit is installed where windy conditions are common,
install wind screens around the unit, maintaining the
clearances specified (see Figure 1). This is particularly
important to maintain adequate head pressure control when
mechanical cooling is required at low outdoor air temperatures.

Figure 1: Service Clearances
Small Cabinet Medium Cabinet

003—006 007—015
Exhaust Exhaust
50 .00 50 .00
Fan Access Fan Access
(1270 mm) (1270 mm)
Outdoor Air Outdoor Air

21.00 (533 mm) 17.00 (431 mm)
Hood Hood
Filter
Access Filter
Access
60 .00 36 .00 60 .00 36 .00

(1524 mm) (914 mm) (1524 mm) 914 mm)
Plenum Discharge,
Electric Heat & Supply Fan
Supply Fan Access Access
Control
48 .00 Control
Panel Gas 48 .00
(1219 mm) Panel Gas
Access 59 .2" (1219 mm)
(1504 mm) Access 59 .2"
(1504 mm)
Large Cabinet
016—028

Overhead Clearance Roof Curb Assembly and Installation

1. Unit(s) surrounded by screens or solid walls must have
no overhead obstructions over any part of the unit. For WARNING
heat pump models overhead obstructions could allow the Mold can cause personal injury. Some materials such
formation of dangerous ice cycles. as gypsum wall board can promote mold growth when
damp. Such materials must be protected from moisture
2. The area above the condenser must be unobstructed in
that can enter units during maintenance or normal
all installations to allow vertical air discharge.
operation.
3. T
he following restrictions must be observed for overhead
obstructions above the air handler section: Locate the roof curb and unit on a portion of the roof that can
support the weight of the unit. The unit must be supported to
a. There must be no overhead obstructions above the
prevent bending or twisting of the machine.
furnace flue, or within 9" (229 mm) of the flue box.
If building construction allows sound and vibration into
b. Overhead obstructions must be no less than 96"
the occupied space, locate the unit over a non-critical
(2438 mm) above the top of the unit.
area. It is the responsibility of the system designer to
c. There must be no overhead obstructions in the areas make adequate provisions for noise and vibration in the
above the outside air and exhaust dampers that are occupied space.
farther than 24" (610 mm) from the side of the unit.
Install the curb and unit level to allow the condensate drain to
flow properly and allow service access doors to open and close
without binding.
The gasketed top surface of the curb seals against the unit
when it is set on the curb. These flanges must not support
the total weight of the duct work. See Installing Ductwork on
page 13 for details on duct connections. It is critical that
the condensate drain side of the unit be no higher than the
opposite side.
Assembly Instructions
Assembly of a typical roof curb is shown in Figure 2, Figure 3
on page 8 and Figure 4 on page 9.
1. Set curbing parts A thru G per dimensions shown over roof
opening or on a level surface. Note location of supply air
opening. Check alignment of all mating screw holes.
2. Screw curbing parts together using fasteners provided.
Leave all screws loose until curb is checked to be square.
3. Square entire curbing assembly and securely tighten all
screws.
4. Position curb assembly over roof openings. Curb must
be level within 0.25 inches from side to side and 1.50
inches over its length. Check that top surface of curb is
flat with no bowing or sagging.
5. Weld curb assembly in place. Caulk all seams watertight.
Remove backing from 0.25 × 1.50 wide gasket and apply
to surfaces shown by crosshatching.
6. Check that electrical connections are coordinated.

Figure 2: Roof Curb Assembly (DPS 003—006)1

LEFT SIDE
BACK SIDE
G
28.69
INSIDE
B
D
IR
L YA
PP H
SU
9.84
INSIDE RE E
TU
RN
AIR
A F
28.76
INSIDE
9.64 C
INSIDE
44.24 61.50
RIGHT SIDE
FRONT SIDE
NOTE: 1. Check submittal drawing for gas/water/electrical/supply/return air opening

DPS 003–006 Roofcurb with ERW Certified Drawing
Horizontal above the roof gas connection only
McQuay International certifies that its equipment will conform to this drawing and McQuay’s
published specifications, subject to its published warranty. Purchaser must determine that the
Model: DPS
equipment is fit and sufficient for the job specifications. No change to this drawing may be made
unless approved in writing by McQuay . www.DaikinMcQuay.com © 2012 McQuay International Date:
Unit Tag: Units: Sheet: __ of __

McQuay International certifies that its equipment will conform to this drawing and McQuay’s Model: DPS
Standard Roof Curb – Small Cabinet Roof Curb for ERW – Small Cabinet equipment is fit and sufficient for the job specifications. No change to this drawing may be made
Unit Tag: Units: Sheet: __ of __
44 .38
Inside
44 .38
Inside
2 .0
2 .0
18 .5
9 .5 Return
Inside Opening
9 .5 Return
Supply 28 .55 Inside Opening
Opening Inside
19 .1
47 .05 Supply 28 .55

Opening Inside
19 .1
28 .69 9 .69
Inside Inside
57 .5
Inside
A A
Curb Detail 28 .69 9 .69

A–A Inside Inside
76 .0
2.0" Inside
Typ.
Curb Detail
A A
A–A
Electrical 14.0" 2"×4"
Nailer 2.0"
Entrance or Typ.
24.0"
3 .9
Electrical 2"×4"
Entrance 14.0" Nailer
3 .9 4.0" or
24.0"
6 .4 3 .9
3 .9
4.0"
6 .4

Figure 3: Roof Curb Assembly (DPS 007–015)1
BACK SIDE
LEFT SIDE
A
E
SUPPLY
B AIR
F
E
RETURN
AIR
A D C
RIGHT SIDE
FRONT SIDE

McQuay International certifies that its equipment will conform to this drawing and McQuay’s Model: DPS

Date:
unless approved in writing by McQuay . www.DaikinMcQuay.com © 2012 McQuay International
Unit Tag: Units: Sheet: __ of __ DPS 007–012 Roofcurb with ERW Certified Draw
Horizontal above the roof gas connection only McQuay International certifies that its equipment will conform to this drawing and McQuay’s Model: DPS
Standard Roof Curb – Medium Cabinet Roof Curb for ERW – Medium Cabinet
Unit Tag: Units: Sheet: __ o
8 .8 8 .8
6 .9 6 .9
2 .0 2 .0
3 .4 3 .4
Electrical Electrical
Entrance Entrance
30 .5 Supply 30 .5 Supply
Inside Opening Inside Opening
34 .88
Inside A A 34 .88 A A
Curb Detail Inside
24 .25 A–A 24 .25
2.0" Curb Detail
81 .5 Typ. 101 .5
Inside A–A
Inside
2.0"
Typ.
14.0" 2"×4"
or Nailer
13 .5 Return 24.0" Return
Inside 13 .5
Opening Inside Opening 2"×4"
14.0" Nailer
or
24.0"
4.0"
48 .38
Inside
20 .0 4.0"
48 .38
Inside

Figure 4: Roof Curb Assembly (DPS 016–028)1
BACK SIDE
LEFT SIDE
A
E
SUPPLY
B AIR
F
E
RETURN
AIR
D D C
A RIGHT SIDE
FRONT SIDE

2. Horizontal above the roof gas connection only
3. All dimensions in inches
Standard Roof Curb – Large Cabinet Roof Curb for ERW – Large Cabinet

Rigging and Handling

Figure 5: Rigging Label 003–015
WARNING
LIFT ONLY AS SHOWN
Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed
to rig loads or operate load rated cranes and/or hoist USE SPREADER BAR
assemblies. Do not use a forklift to lift or maneuver the
unit. Failure to use a load rated crane or hoist assembly
to lift or maneuver the unit can cause severe personal
injury and property damage.
WARNING
Use all lifting points. Improper lifting can cause property
damage, severe personal injury, or death.
REMOVE THE FORKLIFT
CHANNELS BEFORE
CAUTION SETTING THE UNIT ON
THE ROOF CURB
Lifting points may not be symmetrical to the center

of gravity of the unit. Ballast or unequal cable lengths Figure 6: Rigging Label 016–028
may be required. LIFT ONLY AS SHOWN
CAUTION USE SPREADER BAR
Unit is equipped with fork slot reenforcement pieces.

These need to be removed before unit is set on the curb.
Rigging holes for shackles are integral on the unit base. Use
four independent lines, securing one end of a line to a
unit base lifting point and the other end of the line to an
associated spreader bar lifting point. Figure 5 and Figure 6
are examples of instruction labels shipped with each unit.
Use spreader bars to prevent damage to the unit cabinet. Avoid
twisting or uneven lifting of the unit. The cable length from the
bracket to the hook should always be longer than the distance
between the outer lifting points.
If the unit is stored at the construction site for an intermediate
period, take these additional precautions:
1. Support the unit well along the length of the base rail.
2. Level the unit (no twists or uneven ground surface).
3. Provide proper drainage around the unit to prevent
flooding of the equipment.
4. Provide adequate protection from vandalism, mechanical
contact, etc.
5. Securely close the doors.
6. Cover the supply and return air openings.

Table 2: Physical Data—Unit Weights DPS 003 through 028

Small Cabinet Medium Cabinet
Model
003 004 005 006 007 010 012 015
Weight (lbs.)
Base Weight1 1000 1000 1025 1058 1600 1600 1600 1763
Heat pump 1030 1030 1058 1058 1660 1660 1660 1823
Electric Heat 45 45 45 45 100 100 100 100
Hot Water 2 Row 11 11 11 16.5 30 30 30 30
Hot Water 1 Row 32 32 32 20 31 31 31 31
Gas Heat 75 75 63 93 186 186 186 186
Hot Gas Re-heat 8 8 12 12 28 31 31 31
Economizer 163 163 163 163 308 308 308 308
High capacity coil 105 105 105 105 215 215 215 215
Energy Wheel Weight Adds (lbs.)
100% OA 160 160 160 160 300 300 300 300
Mixed Air 175 175 175 175 250 250 250 250
1. Includes standard cooling coil
Large Cabinet Size 3–15 Fan Weights (lbs.)

Model
016 018 020 025 028 12 (in) 87
Base Weight (in lbs.) 2,465 2,575 2,700 14 (in) 91
Heat Pump — — — — — 16 (in) 115
Electric Heat 228
18 (in) 87
1-row 60
20 (in) 91
Hot Water Heat 2-row 100
22 (in) 115
3-row 140
300 175
Curb Weights (lbs.) 14" 24"
Gas Heat 450 225
003—006 156 230
600 275
007—015 200 295
Hot Gas Reheat 30
Economizer 500
016—028 566 657
ERW – Small 350
ERW – Large 400 Table 3: Refrigerant Charge
16" 100
Cooling Model Heat Pump Model
Indoor Fan 20" 150
Unit Size Standard Unit Standard Unit
24" 260 Standard Unit Standard Unit
w/ MHGRH w/ MHGRH
1 36 3 10.5 12.9 12.0 14.4
1.5 41 4 11.1 13.5 12.6 15.0
2 40 5 15.3 18.2 16.8 19.7
3 69 6 15.3 18.2 16.8 19.7
Indoor Fan Motors 5 84 7.5 11.0 17.3 26.0 31.2
7.5 115 10 34.0 39.8 40.0 45.8
10 128 12 34.0 39.8 40.0 45.8
15 211 15 37.0 43.8 42.0 47.8
20 225 16 37.0
Exhaust Fan 250 18 37.0
20 37.0 Consult Factory
25 35.5
28 35.5

Unit Piping - Condensate Drain Connection Damper Assemblies

The optional damper assemblies described in this section
WARNING are ordered with factory-installed actuators and linkages.
Drain pans must be cleaned periodically. Material in The following sections describe the operation and linkage
uncleaned drain pans can cause disease. Cleaning adjustment of the factory option.
should be performed by qualified personnel.
Figure 8: Damper Assembly
The unit is provided with a condensate drain connection, a 3/4"
male NPT for 003–015 units and a 1" male NPT for 016–028
units. For proper drainage, level the unit and drain pan side to Actuator
side and install a P-trap.
Figure 7 shows the layout of the condensate drain connection.
The distance from the drain pan outlet to the horizontal run of
the P-trap should be a distance of twice the static pressure in
the drain pan.
Example: If the static pressure as measured in the drain pan
is 1.5", then the distance between the drain outlet and the
horizontal run should be 3".
Draining condensate directly onto the roof may be acceptable;
refer to local codes. Provide a small drip pad of stone, mortar,
wood, or metal to protect the roof against possible damage.
If condensate is piped into the building drainage system, pitch
the drain line away from the unit a minimum of 1/8" per foot.
The drain line must penetrate the roof external to the unit.
Refer to local codes for additional requirements. Sealed drain
Linkage
lines require venting to provide proper condensate flow.
Periodically clean to prevent microbial growth/algae buildup
from plugging the drain and causing the drain pan to overflow.
Clean drain pans to prevent the spread of disease. Cleaning
should be performed by qualified personnel.
Figure 7: Condensate Drain Connection

Static Pressure (P)
at the Drain Pan
Economizer Dampers
As the single actuator modulates, the outside air dampers
open, the return air dampers close, and the exhaust air exits
the unit through the gravity relief dampers.
The economizer comes with manually adjustable linkage (Figure
8). The damper is set so that the crank-arm moves through
a 90-degree angle to bring the economizer dampers from full
open to full close. Mechanical stops are placed in the crank-arm
mounting bracket. Do not remove stops. Driving the crank-arm
past the stops results in damage to the linkage or damper.
Outdoor Air Dampers (0% to 30%)

These dampers are intended to remain at a fixed position during
unit operation, providing fresh air quantities from 0 to 30% of the
total system airflow, depending on the damper setting.
The damper position may be set at the unit controller keypad
(refer to OM 1141 for further detail). During unit operation, the
damper is driven to the position set at the unit controller. During
the OFF cycle, the damper is automatically closed.

Cabinet Weather Protection Installing Duct Static Pressure Sensor Taps

For all VAV units, duct static pressure taps must be field
CAUTION installed and connected to the static pressure sensor 1 (SPS1)
Transportation, rigging, or maintenance can damage in the unit. Sensor SPS1 is standard on VAV units and is
the unit’s weather seal. Periodically inspect the unit located in the main control panel.
for leakage. Standing moisture can promote microbial Carefully locate and install the duct static pressure sensing
growth, disease, or damage to the equipment and tap. Improperly locating or installing the sensing tap causes
building. unsatisfactory operation of the entire variable air volume
system. Below are pressure tap location and installation
This unit ships from the factory with fully gasketed access recommendations. The installation must comply with local code
doors and cabinet caulking to provide weather resistant requirements.
operation. After the unit is set in place, inspect all door gaskets
1. Install a tee fitting with a leak-tight removable cap in each
for shipping damage and replace if necessary.
tube near the sensor fitting. This facilitates connecting a
Protect the unit from overhead runoff from overhangs or other manometer or pressure gauge if testing is required.
such structures.
2. Use different colored tubing for the duct pressure (HI)
and reference pressure (LO) taps, or tag the tubes.
Installing Ductwork Daikin recommends 3/16" ID tubing.
3. Locate the duct pressure (HI) tap near the end of a long
WARNING duct to ensure that all terminal box take-offs along the
Mold can cause personal injury. Materials such as run have adequate static pressure.
gypsum wall board can promote mold growth when 4. Locate the duct tap in a nonturbulent flow area of the
damp. Such materials must be protected from moisture duct. Keep it several duct diameters away from take-off
that can enter units during maintenance or normal points, bends, neckdowns, attenuators, vanes, or other
operation. irregularities.
5. Use a static pressure tip (Dwyer A302 or equivalent) or
On vertical-supply/vertical-return units, if a Daikin roof curb
the bare end of the plastic tubing for the duct tap. (If the
is not used, the installing contractor should make an airtight
duct is lined inside, use a static pressure tip device.)
connection by attaching field fabricated duct collars to the
bottom surface of the unit’s duct opening. Do not support the 6. Install the duct tap so that it senses only static pressure
total weight of the duct work from the unit. (not velocity pressure). If a bare tube end is used,
it must be smooth, square (not cut at an angle) and
Use flexible connections between the unit and ductwork to
perpendicular to the airstream (see Figure 10).
avoid transmission of vibration from the unit to the structure.
7. Locate the reference pressure (LO) tap near the duct
To minimize losses and sound transmission, design duct work
pressure tap within the building. If the tap is not connected
per ASHRAE and SMACNA recommendations.
to the sensor, unsatisfactory operation will result.
Where return air ducts are not required, connect a sound
8. Route the tubes through the curb and feed them into the
absorbing T or L section to the unit return to reduce noise
unit through the knockout in the bottom of the control
transmission to the occupied space.
panel (see Figure 9). Connect the tubes to appropriate
Ductwork exposed to outdoor conditions must be built in barbed fittings (on SPS1) in the control panel. (Fittings
accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA recommendations are sized to accept 3/16" ID tubing.)
and local building codes.
Figure 9: Typical Wiring Chase, Size 007–015 shown
Table 4: AHRI CFM Ratings
Field
Unit Size AHRI Rated CFM Unit Size AHRI Rated CFM Wiring
3 1140 15 4690 Block
4 1550 16 Consult Factory Behind
5 1810 18 Consult Factory
Panel
6 2310 20 7315
7.5 2885 25 8180
Utility
10 3850 28 8200
Chase
12 4620

Figure 10: Duct Static Pressure Sensing Tubing Installation 3. Locate the building tap so it is not influenced by any
Main Control Panel Condenser Section source of moving air (velocity pressure). These sources
may include air diffusers or outside doors.
4. Route the building tap tube through the curb and feed
it into the unit through the knockout in the bottom of the
control panel (refer to Figure 9). Connect the 3/16" ID
tube to the (high) fitting for sensor SPS2.
5. Locate the reference pressure (low) tap on the roof.
Keep it away from the condenser fans, walls, or anything
else that may cause air turbulence. Mount it high
SPS1
enough above the roof so it is not affected by snow. Not
LO Line
connecting the reference tap to the sensor results in
Roof
HI Line unsatisfactory operation.
6. Use an outdoor static pressure tip (Dwyer A306 or
Remote Sense Point
equivalent) to minimize the adverse effects of wind.
To Sensor Ductwork Place some type of screen over the sensor to keep out
(Remote Location)
HI Input
Rubber
insects. Loosely packed cotton works well.
To Sensor Grommet
LO Input 7. Route the outdoor tap tube out of the main control panel
Tubing Extends
Through Approx. 3/16"
through a small field-cut opening in the upright. Seal the
penetration to prevent water from entering. Connect the
3/16" ID tube to the (low) fitting for sensor SPS2.
Pressure Sensing
Tubing Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
The discharge air temperature sensor must be installed in the
Installing Building Static Pressure Sensor Taps discharge air duct, downstream of the rooftop unit. Locate the
sensor in a location that closely approximates the average
CAUTION duct temperature. To avoid the effects of radiation, the sensor
Fragile sensor fittings. If you must remove tubing should not be in the line-of-sight of a gas furnace or electric
from a pressure sensor fitting, use care. Do not use heater. Generally, locate sensor in the center of a duct wall,
excessive force or wrench the tubing back and forth to 5′ – 10′ from unit opening to allow for air mixing. Do not mount
remove or the fitting can break off and damage sensor. down stream of VAV boxes or other dampers.
Installation: Drill 7/8" diameter hole in duct, insert sensor probe
If a unit has building static pressure control capability, you and secure plate to duct with 2 – #10 screws. Be sure to apply
must field install and connect static pressure taps to the static gasket or silicone sealant to back of mounting plate prior to
pressure sensor SPS2 in the unit. This sensor is located at the screwing plate to the duct to create an air-tight seal.
bottom of the main control panel next to SPS1.
Carefully locate and install the two static pressure sensing Figure 11: Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Installation
taps. Improper location or installation of the sensor taps causes
unsatisfactory operation. Below are pressure tap location and
installation recommendations for both building envelope and
lab, or “space within a space” pressure control applications.
The installation must comply with local code requirements.
Building Pressurization Applications

1. Install a tee fitting with a leak-tight removable cap in each
tube near the sensor fitting. This facilitates connecting a
manometer or pressure gauge if testing is required.
2. Locate the building pressure (high) tap in the area that
requires the closest control. Typically, this is a ground
level floor that has doors to the outside.

Electrical Installation
DANGER Pre-Construction
Hazardous voltage. Can cause severe injury or The Rebel unit comes equipped with a Microtech III controller
death. and can be used for sites that are still under construction. The
Disconnect electric power before servicing equipment. following conditions must be met.
More than one disconnect may be required to de- 1. Ductwork has to be installed. The fan proving switch
energize the unit. and furnace might not run correctly without the specified
external static pressure
WARNING 2. Filters must be installed.
Provide proper line voltage and phase balance. 3. Follow furnace commissioning instructions found in the
Improper line voltage or excessive phase imbalance furnace section.
constitutes product abuse. It can cause severe damage
4. After substantial completion of the construction process
to the unit’s electrical components.
the unit is to be thoroughly cleaned. Special attention
should be paid to the indoor DX coil and the furnace.
WARNING Filters should be changed
Electrical shock hazard. Can cause severe injury or 5. Furnace operation, rate, and temperature rise should be
death. re-verified. See instructions found in the furnace section.
Connect only low voltage NEC Class II circuits to
terminal block TB2. Lab Pressurization Applications
1. Install a “T” fitting with a leak-tight removable cap in each
DANGER tube near the sensor fitting. This facilitates connecting a
manometer or pressure gauge if testing is required.
Overheating or failure of the gas supply to shut off can
cause equipment damage, severe personal injury or 2. Use different colored tubing for the controlled space
death. Turn off the manual gas valve to the appliance before pressure (high) and reference pressure (low) taps, or tag
shutting off the electrical supply. the tubes.
3. Regardless whether the controlled space is positive or
negative with respect to its reference, locate the high
pressure tap in the controlled space (the setpoint can be
set between -0.2" and 0.2" wc).
4. Locate the reference pressure (low) tap in the area
surrounding the controlled space. Not locating the
reference tap to the sensor results in unsatisfactory
operation.
5. Locate both taps so they are not influenced by any source
of moving air (velocity pressure). These sources may
include air diffusers or doors between the high and low
pressure areas.
6. Route the building tap tube between the curb and the
supply duct and feed it into the unit through the knockout
in the bottom of the control panel.
7. Connect the tube to the (high) fitting for sensor SPS2.

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) All Units

Disconnect Power to the Rebel Rooftop Unit prior to Wiring must comply with all applicable codes and ordinances.
inspecting and/or repairing. The warranty is voided if wiring is not in accordance with these
specifications.
When inspecting/repairing Rebel Rooftop units the technician or
building owner must take precautions to ground themselves to According to the National Electrical Code, a disconnecting
the unit. This will prevent them from damaging the circuit boards means shall be located within sight of and readily accessible
mounted inside the inverter box and main control panel. from the air conditioning equipment. The unit can be ordered
with an optional factory mounted disconnect switch. This switch
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) can damage components in a
is not fused. Power leads must be over-current protected at the
manner that is not always readably detectable. A static potential
point of distribution. The maximum rated overcurrent protection
can easily be generated on a person that reaches 25 kVolts. If
device (MROPD) value appears on the unit nameplate.
this potential is discharged into one of the unit’s circuit boards it
can degrade part of the current carrying conductors inside. This All units are provided with internal power wiring for single point
is the conceptual equivalent of reducing 16 gage wires to 18. power connection. The power block or an optional disconnect
The component will still operate initially, but will have a much switch is located within the main control panel. Field power leads
shorter life span due to overheating of the conductor. are brought into the unit through knockouts in the bottom of the
main control panel (see Figure 9 and also Table 5). Refer to the
In order to prevent ESD from the technician to the unit they
unit nameplate to determine the number of power connections.
must both be at the same potential. First the technician must
ground themselves to the unit; this can be achieved by touching NOTE: To wire entry points, refer to certified drawings for
any galvanized (not painted) section of the unit. The unit’s base dimensions.
rail and refrigerant piping are both reliable options. The next
step is to attach a grounded wrist or ankle strap to the copper Table 5: Recommended Field Power Wiring
tubing. This grounding strap must have direct contact with the
Insulation
technician’s skin. Once this has been done the technician is free Ampacity (MCA) Number of Power Wire Gauge Temperature
Wires Per Phase
to work on electrical components in side the unit. Rating (°C)
20 1 14 75
Although ESD is partially dependent on humidity, at levels
25 1 12 75
above 50% it is a greatly reduced risk, good practices should
35 1 10 75
always be observed.
50 1 8 75
65 1 6 75
85 1 4 75
100 1 3 75
115 1 2 75
130 1 1 75
150 1 1/0 75
175 1 2/0 75
200 1 3/0 75
230 1 4/0 75
255 1 250 75
NOTE:
1. All wire sizes assume separate conduit for each set of parallel conductors.
2. All wire sizes based on NEC Table 310-16 for 75°C THW wire (copper). Canadian
electrical code wire ampacities may vary.
3. All wire sizes assume no voltage drop for short power leads.

Field Control Wiring

WARNING
The Rebel rooftop units are available with the following field
Provide proper line voltage and phase balance. control connections:
Improper line voltage or excessive phase imbalance
constitutes product abuse. It can cause severe damage • Space sensor.
to the unit’s electrical components. • Space sensor with setpoint adjustment.
• Fan operation output.
WARNING • VAV box output.
Electrical shock hazard. Can cause severe injury or • Remote alarm output.
death. • External discharge air temperature reset.
Connect only low voltage NEC Class II circuits to • Outdoor air damper minimum position adjustment.
terminal block TB2.
Descriptions of these field connections are included in the
MicroTech III Unit Controller Manual (OM 1141).
DANGER Start-up and service of this equipment must be performed
Overheating or failure of the gas supply to shut off can by trained and experienced technicians. It is highly
cause equipment damage, severe personal injury or recommended that the initial start-up and future service be
death. Turn off the manual gas valve to the appliance before performed by Daikin trained technicians who are familiar with
shutting off the electrical supply. working on live equipment. A representative of the owner or the
operator of the equipment should be present during start-up to
The preferred entrance for power cables is through the bottom receive instructions in the operation, care and adjustment of
knockouts provided on the unit. If a side entrance is the only the unit.
option, a hole may be drilled in the stationary upright.
The minimum circuit ampacity (MCA) is shown on the unit Before Start-Up
nameplate. Refer to Table 5 for the recommended number of 1. Notify inspectors or representatives who may be required to
power wires. be present during start-up of gas fuel equipment. These could
Copper wire is required for all conductors. Size wires in include the gas utility company, city gas inspectors, heating
accordance with the ampacity tables in Article 310 of the inspectors, etc.
National Electrical Code. If long wires are required, it may be 2. Review the equipment and service literature and become
necessary to increase the wire size to prevent excessive voltage familiar with the location and purpose of the furnace controls.
drop. Wires should be sized for a maximum of 3% voltage drop. Determine where the gas and power can be turned off at the
Supply voltage must not vary by more than 10% of nameplate. unit and before the unit.
Phase voltage imbalance must not exceed 2%. (Calculate the
3. Determine that power is connected to the unit and available.
average voltage of the three legs. The leg with voltage deviating
the farthest from the average value must not be more than 4. Determine that the gas piping, meter, and service regulator
2% away.) Contact the local power company for correction of have been installed, tested, and meet the equipment
improper voltage or phase imbalance. requirements.
The power source to the unit must be a balanced 3-phase power 5. Determine that proper instruments will be available for the
supply, meaning that the voltage and impedance to the line is start-up. A proper start-up requires the following: voltmeter,
matched. Under normal conditions, a balanced power supply manometer or gauges with ranges for both manifold pressure
will result in balanced current phase-to-phase. Unbalanced and inlet gas pressure.
voltage and/or current (such as provided with an "Open Delta"
configuration), is likely to result in nuisance alarms, premature
failure of components and it will void equipment warranty.
A ground lug is provided in the control panel. Size the grounding
conductor in accordance with Table 250-95 of the National
Electrical Code.
In compliance with the National Electrical Code, a 115 V factory
mounted service receptacle outlet is provided. This outlet must
be powered by a field connected 15 A, 115 V power supply.
Leads are brought into the unit through the bottom of the main
control panel.

Table 6: 003–015 Electric Heat Data1 Table 7: DPS 016–028 Electric Heat Data
kW Voltage Amps kW Voltage Amps KW Voltage Amps KW Voltage Amps
208 16.7 208 99.9 208 83.4 208 250.1
230 15.1 230 90.4 230 75.4 230 226.2
6 36 30 90
475 7.3 475 43.8 460 37.7 460 113.1
575 6.0 575 36.1 575 30.2 575 90.5
208 33.3 208 149.9 208 125.1 208 333.5
230 30.1 230 135.6 230 113.1 230 301.6
12 54 45 120
475 14.6 475 65.6 460 56.5 460 150.8
575 12.0 575 54.2 575 45.2 575 120.6
208 50.0 208 N/A 208 166.7 208 416.9
230 45.2 230 N/A 230 150.8 230 377.0
18 72 60 150
475 21.9 475 87.5 460 75.4 460 188.5
575 18.1 575 72.3 575 60.3 575 150.8
208 83.3
230 75.3
30
475 36.5
575 30.1
NOTE: 1. Maximum temperature rise equals 60ºF
Table 8: Amp Draw Data

Condenser Fan
Compressor RLA Compressor LRA FLA Each
Unit
Size Compressor 1 - Variable Compressor 2 - Fixed Compressor 1 Compressor 2
(Tons) Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Qty 208 230 460
208 230 460 575 [%] 208 230 460 575 208 230 460 575 208 230 460 575
3 7.7 7.0 3.5 — 45% 0.0 0.0 0.0 — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — 1 0.9 0.8 0.4
4 10.0 9.0 4.5 — 55% 0.0 0.0 0.0 — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — 1 0.9 0.8 0.4
5 11.9 10.8 5.4 — 68% 0.0 0.0 0.0 — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — 1 2.0 1.8 0.9
6 15.0 13.6 6.8 — 89% 0.0 0.0 0.0 — 0.0 0.0 0.0 — 1 2.0 1.8 0.9
7.5 11.9 10.8 5.4 — 68% 8.6 7.8 3.9 — 67.5 73.7 37.1 — 2 2.0 1.8 0.9
10 10.0 9.0 4.5 — 59% 17.5 15.8 7.9 — 93.1 84.2 42.1 — 2 2.0 1.8 0.9
12 15.0 13.6 6.8 — 89% 17.5 15.8 7.9 — See Note 93.1 84.2 42.1 — 2 2.0 1.8 0.9
15 28.3 25.6 12.8 — 100% 17.5 15.8 7.9 — 93.1 84.2 42.1 — 2 2.0 1.8 0.9
16 47.0 42.5 22.9 20.5 — 0 0 0 0 1 8.0 8.0 4.0
18 47.0 42.5 22.9 20.5 — 0 0 0 0 1 8.0 8.0 4.0
20 47.0 42.5 22.9 20.5 — 0 0 0 0 See Note 1 8.0 8.0 4.0
25 47.0 42.5 22.9 20.5 — 39.1 35.4 18.6 15.4 1 8.0 8.0 4.0
28 47.0 42.5 22.9 20.5 — 39.1 35.4 18.6 15.4 1 8.0 8.0 4.0
NOTE: The inverter compresor is controlled to have a soft start and an LRA <1.0
Supply Fan FLA (DPS 003–015) Exhaust Fan FLA (DPS 003–028) Supply Fan FLA (016–028)
Horse Voltage Voltage Voltage
Power
208 230 460 kW 208 230 460 kW 208 230 460 575
1.3 3.1 2.8 1.4 1.0 3.1 2.8 1.4 1.0 — — — —
2.3 5 4.6 2.3 1.7 5 4.6 2.3 1.7 — — — —
3 — — — — — — — — 9.9 9.0 4.5 3.4
4 8.8 7.4 4.0 3.0 8.8 7.4 4.0 3.0 — — — —
5 — — — — — — — — 16.1 14.0 7.0 5.3
7.5 — — — — — — — — 25.0 21.6 10.8 8.2
8 13.5 12.2 6.1 6.0 — — — — — — — —
10 — — — — — — — — 33.0 28.0 14.0 11.0
15 — — — — — — — — 44.8 40.6 20.3 16.2
20 — — — — — — — — 61.0 50.0 25.0 20.0
NOTE: DPS 007–015 575V Amp Draws: Compressors and motors will be run off a 575 to 460V transformer. Motors will be nameplated at 460V.
EAF FLA are per motor. Some DPS 016–028 units have (2) EAFs and motors.

Refrigeration System
Piping System
The Rebel piping system varies significantly between the
multiple possible configurations; heat pump, cooling only, and
modulating hot gas reheat. In spite of this multiplicity there
are some consistent characteristics. All units have a single
circuit with a single or tandem compressor. All units use
an electronic expansion valve (EVI) and a start-up by pass
solenoid valve (SVB).
Figure 12: Typical Refrigeration Circuit for Cooling Only Unit with
Modulating Hot Gas Reheat (DPS 007–015 shown)

Figure 13: Typical Refrigeration Circuit for Heat Pump Unit with Modulating Hot Gas Reheat (DPS 007–015 shown)
Item Description
Indoor coil electronic
EVI expansion valve
Outdoor coil electronic
EVO expansion valve
CV Check Valve, size 3-15 only
REC Refrigerant Receiver
IDF Indoor fan
ODF Outdoor fan
COMP1 Inverter compressor
Fixed speed compressor
COMP3 (7½ thru 15 ton and 25-28
only)
SVB Bypass solenoid valve
RHV Reheat step valve
SVR Receiver solenoid valve
CHV Condenser step valve
Outdoor electronic
OVI expansion valve
4WV 4-way heat pump valve
OS Oil separator, size 3-15 only

DPS 003–015 Component Description

Variable Speed Compressor Receiver
A variable speed compressor (COMP1) is used on all DPS(H) Only Rebel Heat Pump units will have a receiver. Different
003–015. On small cabinet units (3–6 Tons) the variable speed volumes of refrigerant are required inside the system during
compressor will be the only one present. On medium cabinet Mechanical Cooling (or defrost) and Mechanical Heating.
units (7–15 Tons) the variable speed compressor will be on the This is the results of the charge in operating temperatures in
left. The discharge of the variable speed compressor is located Cooling and Heating Mode. The receiver stores the excess
on the side and the suction is located on the top. refrigerant upstream, in Cooling Mode, of the Indoor Expansion
Valve (EVI). Three refrigerant lines connect to the receiver.
These pipes can also be identified by recalling that suction
lines will always be larger than discharge lines. The side In cooling mode the refrigerant leaves (Cooling Mode) the
discharge design is used to create a positively pressurized receiver from the bottom connection on its way to the Indoor
crank case that returns oil to the scroll set even during low turn Expansion Valve (EVI). The refrigerant enters the receiver
down conditions. by the middle connection from the Outdoor Expansion Valve
(EVO). The top connection is linked to the Receiver Solenoid
Figure 14: Compressor Suction and Discharge on Medium Valve (SVR) and is used to bleed refrigerant vapor out of the
Cabinet (7.5T) Heat Pump (DPH) top of the vessel during the change over from Mechanical
Heating to Cooling Mode (or defrost).
Compressor Suction Line In heating mode the refrigerant flow path will be reversed and
will enter the receiver at the bottom connection on its way from
EVI. The refrigerant will leave the receiver from the middle
connection towards EVO. The top connection will always
be a vapor bleed connected to SVR regardless of the units
operating mode.
Compressor Discharge Line Figure 16: Receiver on Medium Cabinet (7.5T) Heat Pump
(DPH)
“Vapor Bleed”
leading to SVR
Fixed Speed Compressor (7–15 Only)

The fixed speed compressor (COMP3) is used on all medium
cabinet (7–15 Ton), DPS, units. This compressor will always be
located on the right and like the variable speed has the suction
line on the top of the dome entering the scrolls and a discharge
exiting from the side of the shell.
Entering Receiver
Figure 15: Compressor Tandem on Medium Cabinet
from Outdoor Coil
(Cooling Mode)
Variable Speed Fixed Speed
Compressor Compressor
(COMP 1) (COMP 3)
Leaving Receiver
to EVI
(Cooling Mode)

Oil Separator Check Valve

All DPS(H) 003–015 units will have an oil separator on the All DPS 003–015 will have check valves on each of the
discharge line of the compressor. This device will remove compressor discharge lines. On medium cabinet units
oil from the compressor discharge gas and return it to the (7–15 Tons), two valves, one on each compressor, prevent
compressor suction line. The oil separator has three lines recirculation of refrigerant during part load conditions. On
entering it. The connection on the side of the compressor small cabinet units (3–6 Tons) a single check valve prevents
is where the discharge gas enters. The hot gas continues migration of refrigerant into the scrolls during off cycles.
on to the Outdoor Coil from the connection on the top of the
separator. On the bottom is a small drain through which the Figure 19: Discharge Line Check Valves on Large Cabinet
oil returns after separation to the compressor suction. The (7.5T) Heat Pump (DPH)
refrigerant and oil path through the separator will not change
depending on Heating or Cooling Mode.
Figure 17: Oil Separator
Y-Joint connecting
COMP1 and COMP2
Hot Gas Discharge
Entering
Outdoor Coil
CAUTION!
Correct Orientation
Must Be Observed
Discharge Gas
from Compressor
Oil Drain into Direction of

Compressor Compressor
Suction Line Discharge Gas
Figure 18: Secondary Oil Separator
Secondary
Oil Separator

High Pressure Switch Four-Way Valve

All Rebel Units will have a high pressure switch on each The Four-Way Valve (4WV) also known as a Reversing Valve
compressor. Medium cabinet units (7–15 Tons) will have an is a component only used on Heat Pumps. This device is
HP1 switch on the variable speed compressor (COMP1) and a used to direct the discharge gas from the compressor into the
HP3 on the fixed speed compressor (COMP3). These switches outdoor coil (Heating Mode) or indoor coil (Cooing Mode). This
are normally closed devices that are brazed directly to the device is defaulted to cooling and when un-energized will direct
refrigerant piping. When the pressure at the switch exceeds the discharge gas into the outdoor coil.
580 PSIG the switch will open. This opening will interrupt the
control signal to the variable compressor drive or de-energize Figure 22: Four-Way Valve
the contactor coil on the fixed speed compressor, both acts
will shut down the compressors and generate an alarm at the Compressor Discharge Gas
MicroTech III keypad.
Figure 20: High Pressure Switch
High Pressure Switch

(HP1)
Cooling Mode:
Suction Vapor from
Indoor Coil Suction Vapor
to Compressor
Heating Mode:
Discharge Gas to
Indoor Coil
Refrigerant Screen
During manufacturing, service, and repair there is always the Cooling Mode:
potential for debris to accidentally enter the sealed refrigeration Discharge Gas to
system. Filter screens are positioned around the refrigerant
circuit to prevent any possible debris from entering critical
Outdoor Coil
components; expansion valves, compressors, etc. These
screens are not bi-direction and must be installed in a specific Heating Mode:
direction if replaced. Please be aware that these screens are Suction Vapor from
not desiccant filters and provide no moisture protection for
compromised systems.
Outdoor Coil
Figure 21: Refrigerant Screen
Refrigerant Screen

By-Pass Solenoid Valve Indoor Expansion Valve

The By-Pass Solenoid Valve (SVB) is used to “short-circuit” The Indoor Expansion Valve (EVI) is a 12 VDC stepper motor
the high pressure compressor discharge to the low pressure driven valve, used in heating and cooling mode. In cooling
suction side during start-up. This increases compressor mode EVI is used to expand the refrigerant entering the Indoor
longevity by minimizing starting torque and inrush current. Coil, operating as an evaporator, in much the same way as a
TXV on a conventional air conditioner. In heating mode the EVI
Figure 23: By-pass Solenoid Valve can operate in two different modes, configurable at the keypad.
Short Circuit between When configured for Standard during heating mode the EVI
will modulate to fully open and remain in this position. When
High Pressure Discharge configured for heating mode the EVI will modulate to maintain
and Low Pressure Suction the Subcooling Set-Point.
Figure 25: Indoor Expansion Valve
Indoor
Refrigerant
Temperature
Sensor (IRT)
Indoor
Expansion
By-Pass Valve (EVI)
Solenoid
Valve
Outdoor Expansion Valve

The Outdoor Expansion Valve (EVO) is a 12 VDC stepper
motor driven valve, used in heating and cooling mode. Cooling
only units will not have this component, only Heat Pumps.
Receiver Solenoid Valve In heating mode the EVO is used to expand the refrigerant
The Receiver Solenoid Valve (SVR) is used to “bleed off” entering the Outdoor Coil, which is now and evaporator,
refrigerant vapor from the top of the Receiver during pump in much the same way as a TXV on a conventional air
down or the transition between mechanical heating and conditioner. In Cooling Mode the EVO can operate in two
defrost. Cooling only units will not have this component, only different modes, configurable at the keypad. When configured
Heat Pumps . for Standard during Cooling Mode the EVO will modulate
to fully open and remain in this position. When configured
Figure 24: Receiver Solenoid Valve for Cooling Mode the EVO will modulate to maintain the
Subcooling Set-Point.
Receiver Vapor Bleed

Solenoid from top of
Valve (EVI) Receiver to
Compressor
Suction

Suction Pressure Transducer Outdoor Refrigerant Temperature

The Suction Pressure Transducer (PTS) is a refrigerant Only Rebel Heat Pumps units will have an Outdoor Refrigerant
pressure sensor that screws onto a Schrader fitting on the Temperature Sensor (ORT). This sensor is used in Cooling
suction line of the compressor deck. On single compressor Mode when ClgEVOmethod is set to control subcooling. This
units (3–6T) this sensor is located on the suction line. On sensor is attached to the refrigerant piping upstream (Cooling
tandem, two compressor units (7–15T), the PTS is located Mode) of the Outdoor Expansion Valve (EVO).
upstream of the joint suction.
This sensor is used to ensure that the compressor does not Figure 26: Outdoor Expansion Valve
leave the operating envelope and is used to regulate the super Outdoor Expansion
heat leaving the indoor coil and entering the compressor. Outdoor
Valve (EVI)
Discharge Pressure Transducer Refrigerant
Temperature
The Discharge Pressure Transducer (PTD) is a refrigerant
pressure sensor that screws onto a Schrader fitting on Sensor (ORT)
the discharge line of the compressor system. On single
compressor units (3–6T) this sensor is located on the
discharge line. On tandem, two compressor units (7–15T), the
PTD is located down stream of the joint discharge.
This sensor is used to ensure that the compressor does not
leave the operating envelope and is used to regulate the
outdoor fan speed and maintain head pressure.
Discharge Refrigerant Temperature

All Rebel units will have a Discharge Refrigerant Temperature Defrost Temperature Sensor
Sensor (DRT1 / DRT3) on the discharge line of each Only Rebel Heat Pump, DPH, units will have a Defrost
compressor. This sensor is attached the piping with a metal Temperature Sensor (DFT). This sensor is used in Heating
clip and wrapped in insulation. The purpose of this device is to Mode and Defrost Mode to determine the amount of frost
increase compressor life by preventing it from running outside accumulated on the Outdoor Coil.
of the operating envelope.
Suction Refrigerant Temperature

All Rebel units will have a Suction Refrigerant Temperature
Sensor (SRT). This sensor is located on the suction line. Unlike
DRT1 or 3 there is only one SRT for tandem compressor
units. This sensor is used to determine the suction super heat
entering the compressor and is the control input for the EVI in
cooling mode (EVO in heating mode).
Indoor Refrigerant Temperature

Only Rebel Heat Pump units will have an Indoor Refrigerant
Temperature Sensor (IRT). This sensor is used in Heating
Mode when htgEVImethod is set to control subcooling. This
sensor is attached to the refrigerant piping downstream
(Cooling Mode) of the Indoor Expansion Valve (EVI).

Heating Defrost
The unit’s heating mode of operation is determined by the (DPS 003–015 ton)
control temperature and the heating setpoint temperature. The
unit enters the heating mode of operation by comparing the Defrost is a temporary and infrequent period during normal
control temperature to the heating setpoint. heating operations on Rebel heat pumps. The purpose of
defrost is to remove frost that has built up on the outdoor coil
The control temperature can be either the return temperature during mechanical heating. In heating mode the outdoor coil
or the space temperature. acts as an evaporator to “pull” heat out of the ambient air. As a
The return temperature is typically used for VAV units and the result the surface temperature of the outdoor coil is below the
space temperature is typically used for CAV units. ambient temperature and depending on conditions maybe below
freezing. During prolonged mechanical heating while the surface
The unit goes into the heating mode of operation when the
temperature of the outdoor coil is below 32ºF frost will form.
control temperature (return or space temperature) is below the
heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband. The defrost operation is similar to mechanical cooling. In defrost
the four way valve will de-energize and the hot gas from the
For example, a standard air conditioning unit with supplemental
compressor will be forced into the outdoor coil, rejecting heating
gas, electric, or hot water heat with a heating setpoint of 68.0ºF
to the ambient, and melting any frost formed on the coil. To
and a deadband of 1.0ºF would enter heating mode if the
speed up the melting process during a defrost cycle the OA
control temperature reached 67.4ºF. When this takes place,
damper will close and the outdoor fan will de-energize. During
the heating mode of operation will begin and the 1st Stage of
this period the supplemental (gas, electric, hot water) heat will
heating operation will start.
ramp/stage up to maintain the unit’s DAT Setpoint.
Heat Pump Rebel heat pump unit’s have demand based defrost control
and will operate in defrost only as long as necessary to remove
(DPS 003–015 ton) frost from the outdoor coil.
The heating mode of operations will be slightly different for heat Charging
pump units. It is the manufacturer’s recommendation that all
Rebel heat pump units be purchased with supplemental gas, Rebel units have advanced charge management systems
electric, or hot water heat. When the control temperature drops that obsolete many common techniques for determining
below the heating setpoint by half the deadband the unit will over or under charged conditions. The charge management
energize the four way valve and initiate mechanical heating. system means that super heat and subcooling values will
float to achieve the peak real time energy efficiency possible
On heat pumps mechanical heating is the primary source of at current operating conditions (building load and ambient
heat and will always be the unit’s first attempt to meet the temperature). Rebel units also use electronic expansion valves
application’s load. After start-up the variable compressor that can not be adjusted manually. Refrigerant should never
will ramp up to meet the DAT Setpoint. If the mechanical be added or removed from the system based on the desire to
heating capacity at the ambient conditions is capable of achieve an arbitrary subcooling value. It will always be Daikin's
meeting the building load the variable speed compressor will recommendation that unit’s suspected of being over/under
stabilize at some value below its maximum speed. If the heat charged have all of their refrigerant removed, leak tested with
pump’s capacity is insufficient at the ambient conditions the nitrogen, and then re-charged based on the unit name plate.
supplemental (gas, electric, hot water) heat will be enabled and
gradually ramp/stage on to make up the capacity shortage.
Table 9: Refrigerant Charge
If the combined capacity of the heat pump’s mechanical and
supplemental heating is greater than the building load the Cooling Model Heat Pump Model
supplemental supply will ramp/stage down. The unit will always Unit Size Standard Unit Standard Unit
Standard Unit Standard Unit
seek to operate with mechanical heating as much as possible. w/ MHGRH w/ MHGRH
3C 10.5 12.9 12.0 14.4
Periodically during heating operations the unit will need to 3M 6.6 11.3
enter defrost to remove frost build up from the outdoor coil.
4C 11.1 13.5 12.6 15.0
During defrost mechanical heating will be unavailable and the
4M 6.5 11.3
supplemental heat will ramp/stage up to meet the DAT set-point.
5 15.3 18.2 16.8 19.7
6 15.3 18.2 16.8 19.7
7.5 11.1 17.8 26.0 31.2
10 20.0 25.8 40.0 45.8
12 20.0 25.8 40.0 45.8
15 24.4 30.2 46.0 51.8
3C & 4C with fin tube outdoor coils
3M & 4M with micro-channel outdoor coils

DPS 016–028 Ton Component Description

Variable Speed Compressor Figure 28: High Pressure Switch
A variable speed compressor (COMP1) is used on all DPS
016-028. On DPS 16–20 ton units, the variable speed
compressor will be the only one present, and be on the right.
The discharge of the variable speed compressor is located on
the top and the suction is located on the side.
These pipes can also be identified by recalling that suction
lines will always be larger than discharge lines. The side
suction design is used to cool the motor with cold refrigerant.
Figure 27: Compressor Suction and Discharge on DPS

025–028 units
Refrigerant Screen
During manufacturing, service, and repair there is always the
potential for debris to accidentally enter the sealed refrigeration
system. Filter screens are positioned around the refrigerant
circuit to prevent any possible debris from entering critical
components; expansion valves, compressors, etc. These
screens are not bi-direction and must be installed in a specific
direction if replaced. Please be aware that these screens are
not desiccant filters and provide no moisture protection for
compromised systems.
Figure 29: Refrigerant Screen
Fixed Speed Compressor (DPS 025–028 Only)

This compressor will always be located on the left and like the
variable speed has the suction line on the side of the dome Refrigerant Screen
entering the scrolls and a discharge exiting from the top of the
shell.

All Rebel Units will have a high pressure switch on each
compressor. HP1 switch is on the variable speed compressor
(COMP1) and HP3 is on the fixed speed compressor
(COMP3). These switches are normally closed devices
that are brazed directly to the refrigerant piping. When the
pressure at the switch exceeds 580 PSIG the switch will open.
This opening will interrupt the control signal to the variable
compressor drive or de-energize the contactor coil on the fixed
speed compressor, Both acts will shut down the compressors
and generate an alarm at the MicroTech III keypad.

Indoor Expansion Valve Suction Pressure Transducer

The Indoor Expansion Valve (EVI) is a 12 VDC stepper motor The Suction Pressure Transducer (PTS) is a refrigerant
driven valve. In cooling mode EVI is used to control the pressure sensor that screws onto a Schrader fitting on the
superheat and expand the refrigerant entering the Indoor Coil, suction line of the compressor deck. On single compressor
operating as an evaporator, in much the same way as a TXV units (DPS 016–020) this sensor is located on the suction line.
on a conventional air conditioner. On tandem, two compressor units (DPS 025–028), the PTS is
located upstream of the joint suction.
Figure 30: Indoor Expansion Valve This sensor is used to ensure that the compressor does not
leave the operating envelope and is used to regulate the super
heat leaving the indoor coil and entering the compressor.
Discharge Pressure Transducer

The Discharge Pressure Transducer (PTD) is a refrigerant
pressure sensor that screws onto a Schrader fitting on
the discharge line of the compressor system. On single
compressor units (DPS 016–020) this sensor is located on the
discharge line. On tandem, two compressor units (DPS 025–
028), the PTD is located downstream of the joint discharge.
Indoor This sensor is used to ensure that the compressor does not
Expansion leave the operating envelope and is used to regulate the
Valve Easy outdoor fan speed and maintain head pressure.
Expansion Discharge Refrigerant Temperature

Valve All Rebel units will have a Discharge Refrigerant Temperature
Sensor (DRT1/DRT3) on the discharge line of each
Access compressor. This sensor is attached the piping with a metal
Panel clip and wrapped in insulation. The purpose of this device is to
increase compressor life by preventing it from running outside
of the operating envelope.
Suction Refrigerant Temperature

All Rebel units will have a Suction Refrigerant Temperature
Sensor (SRT). This sensor is located on the suction line. Unlike
DRT1 or 3 there is only one SRT for tandem compressor
units. This sensor is used to determine the suction super heat
entering the compressor and is the control input for the EVI in
cooling mode.
Bypass Solenoid
The bypass solenoid (SVB) is used to “short circuit” the high
pressure compressor discharge to the low pressure suction
side during startup. This increases compressor life by reducing
the startup torque and inrush current.

VFD Compressor Operation – DPS 016–028

VFD compressor modulation is controlled by a Mobus® signal DPS Size 025 & 028, Two Compressor Units
from the unit controller. The minimum VFD compressor speed If the VFD compressor were to become inoperative, the
is 25 rps (1500 rpm) and the maximum VFD compressor speed unit can continue to operate on the remaining fixed speed
is 100 rps (6000 rpm), but the minimum and maximum limits compressor until the unit can be serviced.
per unit may vary depending on operating conditions and unit
model size. When the VFD compressor is at its maximum speed and
more capacity is required, a fixed speed compressor is started
The VFD compressor is a 4 pole motor design that operates off while the VFD compressor is reduced to minimum speed at
a frequency signal from the VFD between 50Hz and 200Hz. which point it resumes modulating to maintain the discharge
At Start-up the VFD compressor will automatically ramp up to temperature. When the VFD compressor is at its minimum
50 rps for first 10 seconds for lubrication requirements. speed and less capacity is required, a fixed speed compressor
is turned OFF while the VFD compressor is increased to
Crankcase heating for VFD Compressor is performed by the
maximum speed at which point it resumes modulating to
VFD via DC-holding current through the motor windings.
maintain discharge temperature.
VFD compressor modulation is additionally monitored and
adjusted in order to maintain operation within the approved
compressor operating envelope.
Table 10: VFD Compressor Modulation Ranges

VFD Modulation Range
VFD Max rps
VFD and Fixed
DPS Unit
VFD Min rps/ Comp(s) ON
Model VFD Comp Only
VFD Min V 1 Fixed ON VFDMax rps/
VFDMaxV
VFD1Max rps/
VFD1MaxV
016 25 rps/0 Vdc 60 rps/4.0 V 90 rps/6.0 V
018 25 rps/0 Vdc 100 rps/8.7 V 100 rps/10.0 V
020 25 rps/0 Vdc 100 rps/8.7 V 100 rps/10.0 V
025 25 rps/0 Vdc 85 rps/8.0 V 100 rps/10.0 V
028 25 rps/0 Vdc 85 rps/8.0 V 100 rps/10.0 V
* High and Low Oil Boost are explained on page 30

VFD Compressor Control Dehumidification Transition During Cooling State

Control of the VFD compressor is accomplished with a digital When dehumidification operation becomes active while the
output enable signal and a 0-10VDC analog modulating unit is in the Cooling operating state, The VFD compressor
control signal. is ramped to its maximum capacity. If the VFD capacity at
this point is already above 75% of its full modulation a fixed
General VFD Compressor Start Sequence compressor is also turned on. The compressors are held at this
On a call for VFD compressor operation the VFD enable capacity for 1 minute before normal modulation resumes, to
output is energized (on) and the 0-10VDC analog control maintain leaving coil temperature (LCT).
signal is set to 3.33VDC (50 rps) for 10 seconds. During this • VFD compressor will load up completely before starting
10 second initial period the VFD compressor’s internal logic any fixed speed compressors to achieve LCT of 45F
ramps the compressor to 50 rps to insure compressor startup oil (default) with the VFD compressor option. LCT may be
lubrication. After 10 seconds the VFD compressor control signal set between 45F to 52F.
begins modulation to maintain the cooling discharge set point.
• If reheat signal is at 100% for 10 minutes and the unit is
Compressor Stage Up Transition (DPS 025 & 028 Only) unable to raise the DAT to desired point, the controller
will stage off the fixed compressor and modulate the VFD
When the VFD compressor has been operating at maximum compressor speed to achieve the DAT set point.
capacity for the cooling stage time period and there is a call
for more cooling capacity the following transition sequence is Oil Balance/Boost Operational Sequence
followed when staging up.
When a low oil level is indicated in the VFD compressor sump,
During the fixed compressor stage UP sequence, the VFD the unit switches to either an oil balance or oil boost state. The
compressor speed is reduced to its minimum, as a fixed speed VFD compressor speed is increased during these modes to
compressor is turned on. Note that the VFD compressor speed promote the return of refrigerant oil to the VFD compressor.
range is extended for these staging points to assure smooth
transition and to minimize capacity gaps. Typically, the VFD To avoid short cycling of the oil balance/boost sequence, no
compressor is overdriven (higher speed than normal full load action is taken until a low oil indication has been present for 5
rating speed) before staging up the fixed compressor. The consecutive run minutes.
VFD is held at minimum speed for 30 seconds before normal The unit determines whether to enter the oil balance or oil
modulation resumes. boost mode based on the running conditions when a low oil
indication is experienced. The balance mode is only used when
Compressor Stage Down Transition (DPS 025 & 028 Only)
a VFD compressor is part of a tandem compressor set. The
When the VFD compressor has been operating at minimum balance mode is usually entered first, and is utilized to move
capacity for the cooling stage time period and there is a call oil from the fixed speed compressor to the VFD compressor. If
for less capacity the following transition sequence is followed this mode fails to resolve the low oil indication issue, the unit
when staging down. will then go into the boost mode. The boost mode is utilized
During the fixed speed compressor stage DOWN sequence, to return oil from the refrigerant system to the compressors.
the VFD compressor speed is increased to maximum speed VFD compressors that are not part of a tandem compressor
(which varies with unit size and number of operating fixed arrangement will skip the balance mode and only utilize the
compressors) as the fixed speed compressor is turned boost mode.
off. Note that the VFD compressor speed range has been The balance mode will be entered if the VFD compressor is
extended for these staging points to assure smooth transition part of a tandem compressor arrangement and the fixed speed
and to minimize capacity gaps. Typically, the VFD compressor compressor is running, and there is a low oil indication. Upon
will be overdriven (higher speed than normal full load rating entering the oil balance mode the fixed speed compressor
speed) when staging down the fixed compressor. is turned off and the VFD compressor speed is increased to
the oil boost value shown in Table 9 on page 26. The VFD
compressor runs at this condition until the optical oil sensor
verifies that oil is present for 3 continuous minutes. Unit
Controller default is set for a 10 minute max balance.

If the oil balance mode fails to resolve the low oil condition, VFD Compressor Protection Unloading Control
or the fixed speed compressor was not running when the low
There are several modulating control functions that adjust the
oil indication occurred, or the VFD compressor was not part
speed control range of the VFD compressor to protect it from
of a tandemized compressor set, when the low oil indication
damage under abnormal operating conditions. The following
occurred, the unit will enter boost mode
functions are provided by the unit controller
Upon entering oil boost mode, the VFD compressor speed is
• High Pressure Unloading Control
increased to the oil boost value shown in Table 20. If the VFD
compressor is part of a tandem arrangement, the fixed speed • High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control
compressor is started as well. The VFD compressor runs • High/Low Discharge Superheat Control
at this condition until the optical oil sensor verifies that oil is • Condenser Coil Splitter Valve Control (For Low Ambient
present for 3 continuous minutes. Unit Controller default is set Option)
for a 10 minute max boost.
High Pressure Unloading Control
During the oil balance/boost sequence the DAT temperature is
overridden to allow the VFD compressor to continue operating The VFD compressor has an upper operating sat discharge
until oil balance/boost sequence termination. pressure limit of 575 PSIG. If the discharge pressure exceeds
575 PSIG, the compressor speed is reduced 1 rps every 10
Oil balance/boost sequences and durations are logged in the seconds until the discharge pressure is at or below 575 psig.
unit controller.
If the discharge pressure does not drop below 575 PSIG with
If low oil indication does not clear, the VFD compressor will be the VFD compressor operating at minimum speed (30 rps), the
shut down and oil level will be monitored for an additional 15 compressor is locked out on alarm.
minutes. If low oil indication still does not clear within these 15
minutes, the VFD compressor will be locked out on alarm. In addition, when the VFD compressor is operating above a
sat discharge pressure of 525 PSIG, the VFD compressor
The low oil problem is also generated and the VFD compressor maximum speed is limited to 90 rps and the minimum speed is
circuit is disabled if the oil boost sequence is initiated more limited to 30 rps.
than 4 times in a 24 hour period. If the oil balance/boost
sequence successfully restores the VFD compressor oil level A high side pressure transducer is standard on the VFD circuit
the fixed compressor stage is returned to its pre-oil balance/ allowing the discharge pressure of the refrigerant circuit to be
boost condition and normal compressor sequencing and viewed at the unit controller display.
modulation resumes If the unit controller needs to reduce the compressor speed in
order to limit discharge pressure, the action is recorded in unit
controller event log section.

High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control High Superheat

A compressor discharge temperature sensor (Thermistor) is If the VFD compressor discharge superheat rises to 75F for 10
installed on the VFD compressor as standard. The temperature consecutive minutes, the VFD compressor speed is reduced
is used to measure discharge temperature and superheat by 10 rps increments down to a 40 rps operating speed.
levels at the VFD compressor discharge. Superheat is monitored at each speed for 10 minutes and if
superheat remains above 75F, the VFD compressor speed is
If the compressor discharge temp reaches 250F, the VFD
decreased an additional 10 rps. When compressor discharge
compressor speed is reduced by 10 rps and monitored for
superheat level is at 75F or below, the compressor speed is no
3 additional minutes. The unit controller will continue to
longer decreased. If speed correction resolves problem,
reduce VFD compressor speed by 10-rps increments until
the discharge temp drops below 250F. If the VFD compressor the unit controller will have logged that a speed correction was
discharge temp reaches 250F a warning will be logged in the needed for superheat in the event log. If decreasing speed
controller. If reduced compressor speed does not resolve the does not correct issue, the VFD compressor is locked out and
issue, the VFD compressor is shut down and allowed to cool an alarm is logged in the unit controller.
for 30 minutes. The VFD compressor is then re-started and if
the discharge temperature cannot be held under 250F, the VFD Manual Control (with VFD Compressor)
compressor is locked out. The root cause may be connected For service and troubleshooting the unit controller has capability
to a number of issues (low charge, blocked condenser coil, to allow the VFD compressor to be operated manually. Refer to
condenser fan failure, malfunctioning TEV, etc.) and service is the controller OM-920 for more detail.
needed.
The basic manual operations include the following:
The VFD compressor discharge Temp has an upper limit of
• Start or Stop the VFD compressor
275F. The VFD compressor will be shut down if discharge temp
reaches 275F. • Modulate VFD compressor from 0 – 100% speed
• Ability to energize condenser coil splitter solenoids (Only
Low/High Discharge Superheat for low ambient option)
With the high side pressure transducer and discharge • Ability to initiate or terminate oil boost sequence
thermistor, the unit controller is capable of monitoring the
variable speed compressor discharge superheat. This feature If an electrical issue with the VFD compressor is suspected,
protects the VFD compressor against flood back, undercharged the winding resistance can be checked at the motor terminals.
conditions, overcharged conditions, malfunctioning TEV,
etc. Typical compressor superheat range is 20F to 75F. The Table 11: VFD Compressor Winding Resistance
discharge temperature of the VFD compressor can be viewed
Winding Resistance
at the unit controller display. Compressor Model Voltage (Ohms)
208-230V 0.03
Low Superheat VZH-088B-X 460V 0.10
If the compressor discharge superheat falls below 20F for 575V 0.10
15 consecutive run minutes, the VFD compressor speed is 208–230V 0.02
increased by 5 rps increments up to a 60 rps operating speed. VZH-117* 460V 0.08
Superheat is monitored at each speed for 10 minutes and if 575V 0.08
superheat remains below 20F, the VFD compressor speed is * Size 020 only
increased an additional 5 rps. When compressor discharge
superheat level is at 20F or above, the compressor speed is no
longer increased. If speed correction resolves problem, the unit
controller will have logged that a speed correction was needed
for superheat in the event log. If increasing speed does not
correct issue, the VFD compressor is locked out and an alarm
is logged in the unit controller.

VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control Figure 31: Compressor Nameplate Information
If the VFD compressor enable output signal has been ON for
30 seconds and the controller fails to receive the VFD run
verification input, VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control is
activated. When this function is active, VFD compressor enable
output will be turned OFF for 5 seconds and then turned
ON and ramp VFD compressor speed to 60Hz. If controller
receives a VFD run verification input, a log event is set on VFD
Emergency Stop Control. If controller fails to receive the VFD
run verification input after 3 attempts in 30 minutes, the VFD
compressor is locked out and the problem is logged.
Once active the VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control
function remains active until one of the conditions are met.
• VFD compressor enable output signal has been ON for
30 seconds and VFD compressor status Input is ON
A. Model number
• VFD compressor is OFF B. Serial number
If the controller fails to receive the VFD run verification input C. Refrigerant
after the VFD compressor enable output signal has been ON D. Supply voltage to CDS303 frequency converter
E. Housing service pressure
for 30 seconds, the circuit is shut OFF on VFD Compressor
F. Factory charged lubrication
Emergency Stop Control alarm.
G. Compressor frequency and MaxMust trip current
Whenever this protection function becomes active a VFD
Compressor Emergency Stop Control event is recorded in the
Figure 32: Compressor Components
Event Log with date and time stamp. Whenever this protection
function returns to normal a VFD Compressor Emergency Stop
Control return to normal event is recorded in the Event Log
with date and time stamp.
Variable Speed Scroll Compressor

WARNING
The compressor must only be used for its designed
purpose(s) and within its scope of application (refer
to the Operating Limits). Consult the Application
Guidelines. Under all circumstances, the EN378 (or
other applicable local safety regulations) requirements
must be fulfilled.
Daikin units with variable speed inverter compressor are

engineered with fixed speed compressor in such a way that the
unit delivers only the required energy to satisfy space conditions
and provides you with exceptional energy savings. It improves
comfort through precise temperature and humidity control.
Variable speed compressor enhances energy efficiency and
capable of providing unit capacity modulation down to 20% and
reduces compressor cycling and wear on compressor.
Daikin rooftop units with variable speed Inverter compressors
are provided with Internal Permanent Magnet (IPM) motors.
Compressors are designed to vary capacity by modulating
the speed of the scroll set. The speed ratio for the IPM motor
compressor is 4:1 (25 rps to 100 rps). Condenser fan modulation
and an oil management/monitoring system are provided for
reliable operation. The VFD compressor will always be first one
ON and last one OFF.

Oil Injection Control Optical Oil Level Sensor

The VFD compressor contains an oil injection valve and An optical oil sensor is used to monitor oil level in VFD
solenoid (SV11) as standard. The oil injection valve provides compressor sump. The sensor is mounted directly to a fitting
lubrication to the scroll set under low speed/low refrigerant on the VFD compressor shell and can be removed without
velocity situations. The oil injection valve is a normally closed having to depressurize/reclaim the refrigeration system.
valve. Below 50 rps (100 Hz) the valve is closed and directs oil Optical oil indication signal is sent to MTIII Expansion Module
to the scroll set suction port. Above 50 rps (100 Hz) the solenoid ‘C’ (terminals X3 & M). Normal oil indication will provide a
is bypassed and sends oil into sump. The oil injection valve/ contact closure from relay R40. Relay R40 will de-energize
solenoid is mounted directly on the compressor and is controlled during low oil indication, removing signal to terminal X3 and
by the Compressor VFD (relay 1 output, terminals NO & Com). will start the unit in an oil boost sequence. Refer to Figure 35
The coil voltage for the oil injection solenoid is 24 Vac. and Figure 36
The coil can be removed if required by carefully prying off
the valve stem. The wiring connector is attached to the coil Figure 35: Sightglass for Optical Oil Sensor/Switch
by a screw in the center of the housing. Refer to Figure 33
and Figure 34.
Figure 33: Assembly Components
Figure 36: Optical Oil Level Sensor/Switch
Electrical Connections and Wiring

Basic Connections
Depending on the frequency converter version, the physical
Figure 34: Oil Injection Control Dismanteling position of individual connectors may differ. Always make sure
that the compressor terminals, U, V and W are connected to
the frequency converter terminals, 96, 97 and 98 respectively.
The compressor motor cable is shielded and the armoured
part of the cable is connected to a ground on both cable ends;
at the side of the compressor and at the side of the frequency
converter.

Variable Frequency Drive for VFD Compressor

Basic Operation of Compressor Drive:
WARNING
Never bypass the compressor drive or directly connect Start= Connect terminals 12 & 18 for minimum of 5 secs,
the VFD compressor to the main power supply. connect terminals 12 &27 and terminals 13 &37
Stop= Disconnect terminals 12 & 27
WARNING Emergency Stop= Disconnect terminals 13 & 37
The compressor drive is preset to run the compressor
Control/Modulation= 0 to 10Vdc signal to terminals 53 & 55
clockwise.
Run Verification= A contact closure from relay 02 (terminals
WARNING 04 & 05) is provided when drive is running
Variable Speed Inverter Compressor Oil Injection= A contact closure from relay 01 (terminals 01 &
02) is provided when compressor speed is greater than 50 rps
The VFD is factory-programmed and should not
(3000 rpm) which energizes the oil solenoid coil.
be modified in the field. Any modifications will void
the warranty. Compressors are compatible with the The compressor drive contains protection for the compressor
manufacturer’s VFD only. against short circuits at the compressor terminals, overload
protection , phase loss and earth faults. The compressor drive
The compressor drive used for this option is a special series is protected against short-circuits.
(CDS 303) that is intended for use with an IPM compressor
motor and cannot be replaced with any off the shelf VFD. Table 12: Compressor Drive Model & Frame Size
The compressor drive is mounted in the main control box. Compressor Frame Size
Drive Model
Model 208-230V 460V
The compressor drive and the LCP (local control panel) are
VZH-088B CDS303-15kW B4 B3
preset with parameters from the factory and should not need
VZH-117B* CDS303-18kW C3 B4
to be changed in the field. The LCP is removable and is
* Size 020 only
interchangeable with any of the compressor drives used by
any of the VFD compressors. If the need arises to replace the
compressor drive, the parameters can be downloaded from the Refer to the VFD operational manual for more information.
LCP to the new compressor drive.
The compressor drive is preset to run the compressor
clockwise and must be connected as shown in the unit
schematic.
The compressor drive is preset for an open loop configuration
with 0-10Vdc reference corresponding to 1500-6000 Rpm.
The compressor drive generates a soft start with an initial ramp
of 2 seconds. In-rush current (or LRA) to the VFD compressor
is typically not more than a few percent more than rated
nominal Current.
Compressor Speed, modulation signal %, frequency signal,
compressor amperage are all displayed in real time on the
compressor drive screen. Alarms and descriptions will also be
visible on the compressor drive screen.

Optional Modulating Hot Gas Reheat
Modulating Hot Gas Reheat

The reheat coil option comes complete with an aluminum
micro channel coil and modulating hot gas valves for leaving
air temperature control. On a call for dehumidification, the unit
will enable the supply to be over-cooled by the DX coil. Hot
gas from the unit condenser will be routed to an indoor coil
downstream of the DX coil to reheat the air. Hot gas reheat
valves (Figure 37) will control how much hot gas is routed to
the indoor coil to maintain a discharge air setpoint.
Figure 37: Dual 2-Way Valve Refrigeration Schematic (Cooling Model Shown)

Figure 38: Ideal for Neutral Air Ventilation Control
• The rooftop mainly dehumidifies the required ventilation air
• Terminal units provide additional sensible cooling as required
Dehumidification Initiation Dehumidification Termination

An analog sensor is mounted in the return duct, the space, or Dehumidification is terminated if the selected variable, Relative
outdoors to sense Relative Humidity. The location is selected Humidity or Dew Point, drops below the appropriate humidity
by setting the Sensor Location value on the keypad to Return, setpoint by more than half its deadband. Dehumidification is
Space, or OAT. OAT can only be selected for units with DAT also terminated if cooling is disabled for any reason or the unit
control. Dehumidification is disabled when the unit is in either enters either the Heating or Minimum DAT state. For units with
the Heating or Minimum DAT state. When Dehumidification is compressors, the number of cooling stages is reduced by one
enabled, Dehumidification operation is initiated when Humidity and control reverts to normal control when dehumidification
Control is set to either Relative Humidity or Dew Point and is terminated in the Cooling state. Another compressor stage
that value rises above the appropriate setpoint by more than change could then occur after one Cooling Stage Time has
half its deadband. Economizer operation is disabled in the elapsed.
Dehumidification mode so the unit immediately transitions to
Cooling if Dehumidification is initiated in Economizer state.

Control & Arrangement

In conjunction with dehumidification, MHGRH is used to raise • In the reheat mode, the minimum position for the reheat
the temperature of the cooled air to a desirable value. MHGRH valves is 1% (1.0 Vdc). The controller will modulate the
is comprised of a parallel coil arrangement, with dual reheat reheat valves from this starting position.
valves (which operate in concert with one another) and a check • Upon termination of dehumidification (reheat), the
valve. maximum ramp down or decay rate of the reheat control
During Dehumidification control with modulating Hot Gas valves shall be 1% per sec (or 0.1V per sec).
Reheat (MHGRH) an analog signal (0-10Vdc) is controlled as • Upon termination of dehumidification (reheat), staging
described below. of compressor(s) is delayed for 1 minute after reheat
• A PI Loop is used to control the HGRH valves to maintain capacity = 0% (0 Vdc).
the Discharge Air Temperature from the reheat coil. • Every 24 hours, the reheat control valves will be driven to
• Compressor staging during reheat (or dehumidification) their maximum position (10Vdc) and then returned to their
will be controlled by the Leaving DX Coil Temperature. normal operating position (0Vdc). If unit is operating in
For increased dehumidification during reheat, the cooling or dehumidification (reheat) at the prescribed time
standard default compressor staging range is 45 - 52°F. it will be deferred to the next time.
• When dehumidification is active in the Cooling state, the • Dehumidification status can now be found under the
reheat set point equals the DAT Cooling Setpoint. For MicroTech III main system menu. Reheat capacity (valve
DAT units, this is the normal DAT set point resulting from position) can also be found under the main system menu,
any reset. For Zone Control units, this set point is the display based on percentage (0-100%).
result of a PI Loop based on the Control Temperature.
• Communication with the reheat control valves is
accomplished by providing a 0-10Vdc signal to a pair of
interface boards which in turn supply the control signal to
the reheat valves (step type).
• In the Fan Only state, no sensible cooling is required,
but dehumidification mode will still be enabled if the
dew point or humidity sensor is not satisfied. Reheat
set point varies from a maximum value (default 65°F)
when the Control Temperature is at or below the heating
changeover setpoint to a minimum value (default 55°F)
when the Control Temperature is at or above the cooling
changeover setpoint.
Figure 39: Modulating Hot Gas Reheat Schematic

Optional Electric Heat
Optional Electric Heat
Electric Heater Design

If the 10th digit in the model number is an “E”, the rooftop
unit was furnished with a factory installed electric furnace
(Example, DPS010AHCE). The Rebel rooftop units are
available with 4-stage heat output (see capacities in Table 23.
This packaged electric heat rooftop unit is designed for outdoor
non-residential installations only.
The electric heat design consists of a heating coil, DDC staging
control, and all operational safeties. The safety switches include
high-limit temperature switches and individual coil fusing.
The high limit switch is an automatic reset switch. It opens the
control circuit and shuts the heater down when the temperature
reaches the high limit switch closes again allows the heater
to run when the temperature gets below dead band. There is
a second level of protection with an auxiliary high limit switch.
This switch opens up and shuts the heater down when the
temperature exceeds the set point. This switch requires a
manual reset.
Electric Heating Capacity Data
Table 13: Heating Capacity – Electric Heaters

Option # 1 Option # 2 Option # 3 Option # 4 Option # 5 Option # 6
Unit Stages Delta Min Delta Min Delta Min Delta Min Delta Min Delta Min
KW MBH KW MBH KW MBH KW MBH KW MBH KW MBH
T1 (cfm) T1 (cfm) T1 (cfm) T1 (cfm) T1 (cfm) T1 (cfm)
003 15.8 31.6 47.4 60.03 — — — — — — — —
004 2, 11.9 23.7 35.6 59.3 — — — — — — — —
6 20.5 316 12 40.9 632 18 61.4 948 30 102.4 1580
005 SCR 9.5 19.0 28.4 47.4 — — — — — — — —
006 7.9 15.8 23.7 39.5 — — — — — — — —
007 19.0 37.9 56.9 60.03 — — — — — — — —
010 4, 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 — — — — — — — —
18 61.4 948 36 122.9 1896 54 184.3 2844 72.02 245.8 3793
012 SCR 11.9 23.7 35.6 47.4 — — — — — — — —
015 9.5 19.0 28.4 37.9 — — — — — — — —
016 17.5 26.2 34.9 52.4 — — — — — — — —
018
020 30 102 13.5 1580 45 154 20.3 2369 60 205 27.1 3159 90 307 40.6 4739 54.2 — — — —
025 10.8 16.2 21.7 32.5 120 409 43.3 6319 54.2
150 512 7898
028 9.8 14.8 19.7 29.5 39.4 49.2
NOTE: 1. Temperature is calculated at nominal air flow
NOTE: 2. Not available in 208 & 230 Volt
NOTE: 3. 60 degree max rise

Optional Gas Heat
Optional Gas Heat
Daikin Tubular Heater Series Hooded and screened openings for combustion air have been
provided in the furnace(s) access door. The air opening provides
Package Heater Module unrestricted combustion air to the burners and sized such that
a minimum free area is maintained. The minimum free area is
ANSI Z83.8-2013/CSA 2.6-2013 defined as 1 in2 (625 mm2) per 4000 BTUH (2.345 kW).
WARNING The access door provides direct access to the furnace
Fire or explosion hazard. vestibule where the burners, combustion inducer fan, ignition
controls and ignition safeties are housed.
Installation and service must be performed by a qualified
installer, service agency or the gas supplier. The vent discharge is sized such that it is equal to or larger
than the discharge area of the combustion exhaust inducer fan.
Failure to follow safety warnings exactly could result
in serious injury, death or property damage. Be sure A non-adjustable High Limit Switch will shut off the gas supply
to read and understand the installation, operation and to the main burners should the outlet air reach a temperature
service instructions in this manual. Improper installation, exceed 250°F (121°C).
adjustment alteration, service or maintenance can The cabinet supply air flow delivery package has been
cause serious injury, death or property damage. designed to provide sufficiently well distributed air flow across
Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors the heat exchanger to limit temperature rise as follows:
or liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. • Aluminized Steel: 1030°F (575°C)
What to do if you small gas: • 409 Stainless Steel: 1080°F (600°C)
• Do not try to light an appliance Clearance from combustibles to be no less than as listed below:
• Do not touch any electrical switch • Sides and back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 in (152 mm)
• Do not use any telephone in the building • Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 in (51 mm)
• Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 in (152 mm)
• Leave the building immediately
• Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 in (914 mm)
• Call the gas supplier immediately and follow the gas • Vent pipe to any combustible surface . . . . . 6 in (152 mm)
supplier's instructions
Do not use this package heater if any part has been under
• If you cannot reach the gas supplier, call the fire water. Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect
department the heater and any gas control which has been under water.
NOTICE Gas Furnace Design

DAT heater series modules are a recognized furnace If the 10th digit in the model number is a “G”, the rooftop
component design certified by Intertek Testing Services (ETL). unit was furnished with a factory installed furnace (Example,
For outdoor installation and installation downstream from DPS010AHCG). The Rebel commercial rooftop units are
refrigeration systems in cabinet applications. available with either the low, medium and high heat input
furnace (see capacities in Table 14). This packaged gas heat
This furnace must be installed in the designated non- rooftop unit is designed for outdoor non-residential installations
combustible heat chamber of the cabinet. If it is removed, it only. Furnace to be supplied with natural gas or LP only.
is only to be replaced with an approved Original Manufacture The gas heat furnace design consists of a tubular heat
Equipment Supplier furnace(s), installed and operated as exchanger, in-shot burner manifold with gas valve, induced
specified by the approved Original Manufacture Equipment combustion blower, gas heat DDC control module and all
Supplier. It is not designed to have any portion of the heat operational safeties. The tubular heat exchanger can come
exchanger outside the cabinet in which the furnace module is with the standard aluminized steel construction or the optional
housed. stainless steel construction. The safety switches include a
The Rating Plate/Name Plate has been permanently attached high-limit temperature switch, an auxiliary high-limit switch,
to the furnace assembly. It contains information including gas a combustion blower proof of airflow, and the flame roll-out
type, maximum and minimum input rating, manifold pressure, switch (see Figure 41).
maximum and minimum inlet gas pressure, maximum and Figure 40: Typical Gas Heat Section (Size 000 shown)
minimum airflow requirements, output capacity and electrical
rating for the furnace. The plate also includes model number, Gas
serial number and scan code. This plate is to always remain Field
attached to the furnace. Piping
This furnace must be applied in accordance with the
requirements of its listing.

Optional Gas Heat
Gas Heating Capacity Data
Table 14: DPS 003-015 Gas Heating Capacities

Unit Size
Data 003 - 006 007 - 015
Low Heat Med Heat High Heat Low Heat Med Heat High Heat
Heating Input (MBh) 80 120 160 200 300 400
Heating Output (MBh) 64 96 128 160 240 320
Steady State Efficiency 80%
Number of Stages 2
Turndown1 5:1 10:1
Maximum Temperature Rise3 60/100
Gas Connection Size 1/2" 3/4"
Min/Max External Static Pressure 0.5"/2.5"
Gas Main Pressure
Natural Gas (in. wc) 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14
Propane (in. wc) 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14
Manifold Pressure Natural Gas (per gas valve)
Stage 1 (in. wc) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Stage 2 (in. wc) 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
Low fire2 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
Manifold Pressure Propane Gas (per gas valve)
Stage 1 (in. wc) 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3
Stage 2 (in. wc) 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
Low fire2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
NOTE:
1. Modulating heat only.
2. Modulating heat not available with propane.
3. Aluminized steel 60°, Stainless steel 100°
Table 15: DPS 016–028 Gas Heating Capacities

Unit Size
Data 016 - 028
Low Heat Medium Heat High Heat
Heating Input (MBh) 300 300 450 450 450 600 600 600
Heating Output (MBh) 240 240 360 360 360 480 480 480
Steady State Efficiency 80%
Control (stage/modulating) 2 Mod 2 4 Mod 2 4 Mod
Turndown 2:1 5:1 2:1 4:1 10:1 2:1 4:1 10:1
Maximum Temperature Rise 100
Gas Connection Size ¾"Ø
Min/Max External Static Pressure 0.5"/2.5" wc
Gas Main Pressure
Natural Gas (in wc) 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14
Propane Gas (in wc) 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14
Manifold Pressure Natural Gas (per gas valve)
Stage 1 (in wc) 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88
Stage 2 (in wc) 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
Low Fire 0.88 0.26 0.88 0.88 0.26 0.88 0.88 0.26
Manifold Pressure Propane Gas (per gas valve)
Stage 1 (in wc) 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Stage 2 (in wc) 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
Low Fire 2.5 0.74 2.5 2.5 0.74 2.5 2.5 0.74

Optional Gas Heat
Figure 41: Typical Modulating Furnace Assembly (016–028 shown)
7 6 3 2 1 Item Description
1 Furnace
2 Inducer Combustion Blower
3 Plate-Inducer Orifice
4 Transformer – 40 VA
11 5 Spark Igniter (2)
6 Ignition Control #1
17
7 Ignition Control #2
4 8 Gas Safety Valve #1
9 Gas Safety Valve #2
10 Gas Modulating Valve
11 Gas Modulating Control
12 Burner In-Shot (Typ)
13 Flame Roll-Out Switch (2)
14 Flame Sensor (2)
15 High Limit Temperature Switch
16 Proof of Airflow Switch
10 17 Control Relay (Typ)
8
16
14 5
12
15 13
9
Warranty Exclusion Ventilation & Flue Pipe Requirements

Warranty is void if the furnace is operated in the presence of The Rebel rooftop unit is equipped with an outdoor air hood to
chlorinated vapors, if the airflow through the furnace is not in supply adequate combustion air. The unit also has a flue outlet
accordance with rating plate, or if the wiring or controls have assembly and requires no additional chimney, flue pipe, Breidert
been modified or tampered with. cap, draft inducer, etc.
WARNING CAUTION
Snow levels must be controlled to prevent moisture
Hot surface hazard. Can cause severe equipment
and air flow blockage to the furnace enclosure and
damage, personal injury, or death. Allow burner
combustion air stream.
assembly to cool before servicing equipment.
Installation
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Units equipped with gas heating must not be operated
in an atmosphere contaminated with chemicals which Connect this unit only to gas supplied by a commercial
will corrode the unit such as halogenated hydrocarbons, utility. This furnace must be installed by an experienced
chlorine, cleaning solvents, refrigerants, swimming pool professional installation company that employs fully
exhaust, etc. Exposure to these compounds may cause trained and experienced technicians. Install the gas
severe damage to the gas furnace and result in improper piping in accordance local codes and regulations of the
or dangerous operation. Operation of the gas furnace in local utility company. In the absence of local codes, follow
such a contaminated atmosphere constitutes product abuse the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54, or the
and will void all warranty coverage by the manufacturer. CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code –
Questions regarding specific contaminants should be referred latest editions. Note: The use of flexible gas connectors
to your local gas utility. is not permitted.
WARNING
Sharp edges hazard. Can cause personal injury or death.
Sheet metal parts, self-tapping screws, clips, and similar
items inherently have sharp edges, and it is necessary that
the installer exercise caution when handling these items.

Optional Gas Heat
Electrical Gas Pressure Requirements

The Daikin burner receives its electrical power from the main unit The pressure furnished to the main gas valve must not exceed
control panel. No additional power wiring must be routed to the 13.9" wc. When the supply pressure is above 13.9" wc, a high
burner. The sequencing of the burner is also controlled through pressure regulator must precede the appliance gas pressure
this panel and therefore is factory wired. No additional wiring will regulator. The inlet gas pressure must not exceed the maximum
be required. pressure rating of the high pressure regulator, and the outlet
pressure must furnish gas to the appliance pressure regulator
DANGER within the pressure range mentioned above.
If you do not follow these instructions exactly, a fire or Gas Piping
explosion may result causing property damage, personal
injury, or loss of life. Gas piping must be sized to provide the minimum required
A. This appliance does not have a pilot. It is equipped with an pressure at the burner when the burner is operating at maximum
ignition device which automatically lights the burner. Do not input. Consult your local utility on any questions on gas pressure
try to light the burner by hand. available, allowing piping pressure drops, and local piping
B. Before operating, smell all around the appliance area for requirements. The weight of field supplied gas piping must be
gas. Be sure to smell next to the floor because some gas is supported by field supplied brackets or hangers.
heavier than air and will settle on the floor.
The proper size piping must be run from the meter to the gas
WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS: burner without reductions. Undersized piping will result in
• Do not try to light any appliance. inadequate pressure at the burner. The pressure will be at its
• Do not touch any electric switch, do not use any phone in lowest when it is needed the most, at times of maximum demand.
your building. Therefore, it can cause intermittent hard-to-find problems because
• Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor’s the problem may have left before the service technician has
phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions. arrived. Avoid the use of bushings wherever possible.
• If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire Remove all burrs and obstructions from pipe. Do not bend pipe;
department. use elbows or other pipe fittings to properly locate pipe.
C. Use only your hand to push in or turn the gas control knob.
A drip leg and a manual shut-off must be installed in the vertical
Never use tools. If the knob will not push in or turn by hand,
don’t try to repair it, call a qualified service technician. Force line before each burner such that it will not freeze. Install unions
or attempted repair may result in a fire or explosion. so gas train components can be removed for service. All pipe
threads must have a pipe dope which is resistant to the action of
D. Do not use this appliance if any part has been under water.
Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the Propane gas. After installation, pressurize the piping as required
appliance and to replace any part of the control system and and test all joints for tightness with a rich soap solution. Any
any gas control which has been under water. bubbling is considered a leak and must be eliminated. Do not use
a match or flame to locate leaks.
DANGER
The spark ignitor and ignition control are high voltage. Keep
hands and tools away to prevent electrical shock. Shut off
electrical power before servicing any of the controls. Failure
to adhere to this warning can result in personal injury or death.

Optional Gas Heat
Auxiliary Limit Switch Function

The auxiliary limit switch is a manually resetable switch and is Figure 42: 3–6 Ton—Auxiliary Limit Switch
designed to trip in the event of a supply fan failure. It should not
View of supply fan
trip during any other conditions. In the event of a blockage to the with aux limit behind,
return or discharge air, the primary limit, which is an automatic- mounted on a bracket
reset type, is designed to trip. off the cabinet wall
Should there be a fan failure which results in the tripping of the
auxiliary limit, the limit must be manually reset to resume function
of the unit.
On the Rebel A cabinet (3-6 ton), the auxiliary limit resides in
the fan compartment between the furnace heat exchanger and
the fan. To access the switch, the fan compartment door must Figure 43: 7–15 Ton—Auxiliary Limit Switch
be opened. Be sure all power to the unit is disconnected before The auxiliary limit on the
opening the fan compartment door. B cabinet (7-15 ton) is in
the furnace compartment
Once the fan compartment door is opened the auxiliary limit
(vestibule) above the furnace
switch can be found behind the supply fan on a bracket mounted
to the cabinet wall.
Depressing the red button on the auxiliary limit will reset the limit
and allow the furnace to be powered. The furnace should now
respond to a call for heat.
Again, the red button must be depressed in order to reset the limit Figure 44: 016–028 Auxiliary Switch
and allow the furnace to be powered.
The auxiliary limit
on the C cabinet
(17-28 ton) is in
the compressor
compartment above
the furnace vestibule.
The red button of
auxiliary limit switch
must be depressed in
order to reset the limit
and allow the furnace
to be powered.

Optional Gas Heat
Figure 45: Capacity of Pipe Natural Gas (CFH)

With Pressure Drop of 0.3" Wc & Specific Gravity Of 0.60
Pipe Size-inches (Ips)
Pipe Length (ft.)
½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 4
10 132 278 520 1050 1600 2050 4800 8500 17500
20 92 190 350 730 1100 2100 3300 5900 12000
30 73 152 285 590 890 1650 2700 4700 9700
40 63 130 245 500 760 1450 2300 4100 8300
50 56 115 215 440 670 1270 2000 3600 7400
60 50 105 195 400 610 1150 1850 3250 6800
70 46 96 180 370 560 1050 1700 3000 6200
80 53 90 170 350 530 990 1600 2800 5800
90 40 84 160 320 490 930 1500 2600 5400
100 38 79 150 305 460 870 1400 2500 5100
125 34 72 130 275 410 780 1250 2200 4500
150 31 64 120 250 380 710 1130 2000 4100
175 28 59 110 225 350 650 1050 1850 3800
200 26 55 100 210 320 610 980 1700 3500
NOTE: Use multiplier below for other gravities and pressure drops.
Table 16: Specific Gravity Other Than 0.60 Table 17: Pressure Drop Other Than 0.3"
Specific Gravity Multiplier Pressure Drop Multiplier Pressure Multiplier
0.50 1.100 0.1 0.577 1.0 1.83
0.60 1.000 0.2 0.815 2.0 2.58
0.70 0.936 0.3 1.000 3.0 3.16
0.80 0.867 0.4 1.16 4.0 3.65
0.90 0.816 0.6 1.42 6.0 4.47
1.00 0.775 0.8 1.64 8.0 5.15
PROPANE-AIR
1.10 0.740
PROPANE
1.55 0.622
BUTANE
2.00 0.547

Optional Gas Heat
Gas Piping Routing Into Unit

On-The-Roof Piping
1. Remove knockout on upright (refer to Figure 46, Figure Figure 48: Rebel C Cabinet 016–028 Gas Piping
47 or Figure 48).
2. Route gas supply pipe through hole. Carefully plan pipe Field Piping. Piping to
route and fitting locations to avoid interference with be supported such that
if does not generate
swinging of doors, etc.
force (weight) and/or
3. The Rebel unit does not have an option for gas piping torque (twist) on the
through the curb. Factory gas manifold(s).
4. Field piping to be supported such that it does not

generate a force (weight) and/or torque (twist) on the
Factory gas manifold(s).
The appliance must be isolated from the gas supply system by
closing off the manual shut off valve during any pressure testing
less than 0.5 psi (3.5 kPa) of the gas supply piping system.
The appliance and its individual shut-off valve must be
disconnected from the gas supply system during any pressure
testing greater than or equal to 0.5 psi (3.5 kPa).
Regulator to be sized for the maximum total Btu input required
for the heater(s).
Figure 46: Rebel A Cabinet 003–006 Gas Piping

Field Piping. Piping to
be supported such that
if does not generate
Field piping entrance
force (weight) and/or
Factory gas manifolds point into cabinet
torque (twist) on the
Factory gas manifold(s).
Figure 49: Field Gas Heat Connections
Unit Gas Supply

From Gas Meter Connection*
Figure 47: Rebel B Cabinet 007–015 Gas Piping
Field Piping. Piping to be Manual Gas
supported such that if Shut-Off Valve
does not generate force
(weight) and/or torque
with 1/4" NPT
(twist) on the Factory gas Test Plug
manifold(s).
* Factory-supplied grommet must be utilized

Optional Gas Heat
DPS 016–028 Gas Pipe Manifold Pressure Adjustment

For Two Stage Furnace For Modulating Furnace:
1. Read gas pressure at the Inlet Pressure Tap of the 1. Read gas pressure at the Inlet Pressure Tap of the
Honeywell VR8305Q Gas Safety Control Valve (Figure Honeywell VR8305Q Gas Safety Control Valve (Figure
50) and confirm pressure is at 7.0" wc for natural gas or 50) and confirm pressure is at 7.0" wc for natural gas or
11.0" for propane. Adjust upstream pressure reducing 10.0" for propane. Adjust upstream pressure reducing
gas regulator as required to obtain 7.0" wc gas pressure gas regulator as required to obtain 7.0" wc natural gas
for natural gas or 11.0" for propane. pressure or 10.0 for propane.
2. The gas pipe manifold pressure for high fire (stage 2. The gas pipe manifold pressure for high fire should be set
#2) should be set at 3.5" wc for natural gas or 10.0" at 3.5" wc for natural gas or 8.2" for propane. Adjust the
for propane. Adjust the High Pressure Adjustment High Pressure Adjustment on the Honeywell VR8305Q
Honeywell VR8305Q Gas Safety Control Valve Gas Safety Control Valve (Figure 50) as required.
(Figure 50) as required. Screwing the adjustment Screwing the adjustment clockwise will increase pressure;
clockwise will increase pressure; counter clockwise counter clockwise will decrease pressure.
will decrease pressure. 3. The gas pipe manifold pressure for low fire (stage #1)
3. The gas pipe manifold pressure for low fire (stage should be set at 0.26" wc for natural gas or 0.74" for
#1) should be set at 0.88" wc for natural gas or 2.5" propane.
for propane. Adjust the Low Pressure Adjustment Adjust the Low Pressure Adjustment on the Honeywell
Honeywell VR8305Q Gas Safety Control Valve (Figure VR8305Q Gas Safety Control Valve (Figure 50) as
50) as required. Screwing the adjustment clockwise required until pressure at the Honeywell VR8305Q Gas
will increase pressure; counter clockwise will decrease Safety Control Valve Outlet Pressure Tap reads 0.26"
pressure. wc for natural gas or 0.74" for propane. Screwing the
adjustment clockwise will increase pressure; counter
clockwise will decrease pressure.
Adjust the Maxitrol M520B Modulating Valve (Figure 51)
Low Flow Adjustment screw until the gas pipe manifold
pressure reads 0.26" w.c. for natural gas or 0.74" for
propane.
Figure 50: Honeywell VR8305Q Gas Safety Control Valve Figure 51: Maxitrol M520B Modulating Valve
Used for Both Staged and Modulating Furnaces
High Pressure Adjustment

Pressure Regulator Adjustment
(under cap screw)
Low Pressure Adjustment
ON–OFF Gas Control Knob
Outlet Pressure Tap
Inlet Pressure Tap
Low Flow Adjustment Tap

(right side)
Low Flow Adjustment Tap
(left side)
White Rogers is also used — functionally the same but different in

appearance.

Optional Gas Heat
DPS 003–015 Sequence of Operation

LP Conversion (Staged Furnace Only)
DANGER
Never test for gas leaks with an open flame. It can For Rebel A and B Cabinets Only
cause an explosion or fire resulting in property damage, Convert the furnace in this unit using the liquefied petroleum
personal injury, or death. Use a commercially available (LP) gas valve spring and burner nozzles supplied in the
soap solution made specifically for the detection of conversion kit. See Table 18 for part numbers.
leaks to check all connections.
The LP gas valve maintains the proper manifold pressure for
LP gas. See Table 18. The correct burner orifices are included
WARNING in the kit.
This unit is equipped at the factory for use with natural
gas only. Conversion to LP gas requires a special kit Table 18: Furnace Identification for LP Conversion
supplies by Daikin Parts. Failure to use the proper
Unit Size Staged Furnace
conversion kit can cause fire, carbon monoxide
3 – 6 Ton Unit 300049725
poisoning, explosion, personal injury, property damage,
or death. 7 – 15 Ton Unit 300049583
Staged Control Altitude Conversion

The following details the sequence of operation for the low For elevations up to 2,000 feet, rating plate input ratings apply.
heat option. For high altitudes (elevations over 2,000 ft.), contact Daikin
1. Unit DDC control calls for heat. Parts. See Table 19 for part numbers.
2. Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat.
Table 19: Furnace Identifications for Altitude (DPS 003–015)
3. High limit switch is checked for safe condition.
Elevation Part Number
4. Proof of airflow switch is check for combustion airflow.
Staged Operation
5. 60 second prepurge cycle starts. 2000–2999 300049578
6. Spark ignitor is activated for 3 seconds. 3000–3999 300049579
4000–4999 300049580
7. Gas valve receives a command for stage 1 of heat.
5000–5999 300049581
8. Burner is ignited. 6000–6999 300049582
9. Unit DDC controller calls for stage 2 of heat.
10. Furnace DDC controller receives a stage 2 heat
command.
11. Gas valve receives a command for stage 2 of heat.
Modulating Control
The following details the sequence of operation for the low
heat option.
1. Unit DDC controller calls for heat.
2. Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat.
3. Furnace safety switches and DDC control are checked
for safe conditions.
4. 45 second prepurge cycle starts. Proof of airflow switch
is checked for combustion airflows.
5. Spark ignitor is activated.
6. Gas valve receives a signal to open fully.
7. Burner is ignited and runs for 20 seconds in high fire.
Note: if call for heat is interrupted during this timing, the
furnace will be locked in for the 20 seconds cycle.
8. Gas valve and induction blower motor receives a signal
to modulate burner output to match the unit discharge air
temperature setting.

Optional Gas Heat
DPS 016–028 Sequence of Operation

Modulating Control
DANGER
The following details the sequence of operation for the low
Never test for gas leaks with an open flame. It can heat option.
cause an explosion or fire resulting in property damage,
personal injury, or death. Use a commercially available 1. Unit DDC control calls for heat.
soap solution made specifically for the detection of 2. Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat.
leaks to check all connections.
3. High limits switch(s) are checked for safe conditions.
WARNING 4. Proof of air flow switch is checked for combustion

induced draft airflow. Combustion draft inducer fan will be
This unit is equipped at the factory for use with natural operating at high speed.
gas only. Conversion to LP gas requires a special kit
supplies by Daikin Parts. Failure to use the proper 5. 30 second pre-purge cycle starts.
conversion kit can cause fire, carbon monoxide 6. Spark ignitor is activated for 3 seconds.
poisoning, explosion, personal injury, property damage,
7. Gas safety shut-off valve is opened.
or death.
8. Gas modulating valve is run to 66% open.
Staged Control 9. Burner is ignited.
The following details the sequence of operation for the low 10. Gas modulating valve remains at 66% open for 30
heat option. seconds.
1. Unit DDC control calls for heat. 11. After 30 seconds have elapsed, modulating controller
opens and closes gas control valves as required based
2. Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat. on heat input requirement from Unit DDC control.
3. High limits switch(s) are checked for safe conditions. 12. Unit DDC control input for 8–30% of span will result in
4. Proof of air flow switch is checked for combustion heat input up to 30% of full heating capacity. The gas
induced draft airflow. train with the modulating valve will be used to achieve
the heating during this phase. Combustion draft inducer
5. 30 second pre-purge cycle starts.
fan will be operating at low speed.
6. Spark ignitor is activated for 3 seconds.
13. Unit DDC control input for 30–55% of span will result in
7. Gas valve receives a command for stage 1 heat heat input up to 50% of full heating capacity. The gas
8. Burner is ignited. train with the modulating valve will be used to achieve
the heating during this phase. Combustion draft inducer
9. Unit DDC controller calls for stage 2 of heat. fan will be operating at high speed.
10. Furnace DDC controller receives a stage 2 heat 14. Unit DDC control input for 55–75% of span will result in
command. heat input up to 75% of full heating capacity. The gas
11. Gas valve receives a command for stage 2 of heat. train with the modulating valve will be used to achieve
the heating during this phase. The gas train with the
two stage gas safety valve will be used to achieve the
heating during this phase. Stage 1 coil of the two stage
gas safety will be energized. Combustion draft inducer
fan will be operating at high speed.
15. Unit DDC control input for 75–100% of span will result in
heat input up to 100% of full heating capacity. The gas
train with the modulating valve will be used to achieve the
heating during this phase. The gas train with the 2 stage
gas safety valve will be used to achieve the heating during
this phase. Stage 1 coil and Stage 2 coil of the two stage
gas safety will be energized. Combustion draft inducer fan
will be operating at high speed.

Optional Gas Heat
Altitude Conversion Start-Up Procedures

For elevations up to 2000 feet, rating plate input ratings apply. Start-Up Responsibility
For high altitudes (elevations over 2000 ft) contact Daikin
Applied Parts. See Table 20 for part numbers. Or contact local DANGER
gas supplier to confirm gas heating value has been devalued Overheating or failure of the gas supply to shut
for applicable elevations. off can cause equipment damage, severe personal
injury or death. Turn off the manual gas valve to the
Table 20: Furnace Identification for Altitude (DPS 016–028) appliance before shutting off the electrical supply.
Elevation Part Number
The start-up organization is responsible for determining that
Natural Gas Fired Furnace with 50 MBH Burners
the furnace, as installed and as applied, will operate within the
2000–2999 910166410 limits specified on the furnace rating plate.
3000–3999 910166411
1. The furnace must not operate at insufficient airflow or
4000–4999 910166412
temperature rise greater than specified (refer to Table
5000–5999 910166413
14 on page 41). On variable air volume systems it
6000–6999 910166415 must be determined that the furnace will not be operated
Natural Gas Fired Furnace with 45 MBH Burners if or when system cfm is reduced below the specified
2000–2999 910166412 minimum airflow cfm.
3000–3999 910166416
2. It must be established that the gas supply is within the
4000–4999 910166417 proper pressure range (refer to Table 14 on page 41).
5000–5999 910166415
Start-up and service of this equipment must be performed by
6000–6999 910166418
trained and experienced technicians. It is highly recommended
LPG Gas Fired Furnace with 50 MBH Burners
that the initial start-up and future service be performed by
2000–2999 910166419 Daikin trained technicians who are familiar with working on
3000–3999 910166420 live equipment. A representative of the owner or the operator
4000–4999 910166421 of the equipment should be present during start-up to receive
5000–5999 910166422 instructions in the operation, care and adjustment of the unit.
6000–6999 910166424
Before Start-Up
LPG Gas Fired Furnace with 45 MBH Burners
2000–2999 910166425 1. Notify inspectors or representatives who may be required
3000–3999 910166422 to be present during start-up of gas fuel equipment.
4000–4999 910166427
These could include the gas utility company, city gas
inspectors, heating inspectors, etc.
5000–5999 910166428
6000–6999 910166429 2. Review the equipment and service literature and become
familiar with the location and purpose of the furnace
controls. Determine where the gas and power can be
turned off at the unit and before the unit.
3. Determine that power is connected to the unit and
available.
4. Determine that the gas piping, meter, and service
regulator have been installed, tested, and meet the
equipment requirements.
5. Determine that proper instruments will be available for
the start-up. A proper start-up requires the following:
voltmeter, manometer or gauges with ranges for both
manifold pressure and inlet gas pressure.
Start-Up Preliminary
Close gas main.
1. Check the burner fan wheel for binding, rubbing, or loose
setscrews.
2. Check power.
3. Purge the gas lines.
4. Leak check. Using a rich soap-water mixture and a
brush, check the gas lines for leaks. Correct all leaks
before starting furnace.

Optional Gas Heat
Operating Procedures
Turning OFF Gas to the Appliance
DANGER
1. Set the controller to the lowest setting.
If you do not follow these instructions exactly, a fire
or explosion may result causing property damage, 2. Turn OFF all electrical power to the appliance if service
personal injury, or loss of life. is to be performed.
A. This appliance does not have a pilot. It is equipped 3. Open the control access panel.
with an ignition device which automatically lights the
burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand. 4. Turn the gas control knob clockwise to “OFF”. Do not
B. Before operating, smell all around the appliance area force.
for gas. Be sure to smell next to the floor because 5. Close the control access panel.
some gas is heavier than air and will settle on the
floor. Service
WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS: The furnace DDC controller has diagnostic information for
• Do not try to light any appliance. troubleshooting the furnace operation. The ignition control
• Do not touch any electric switch, do not use any module has a LED light that will flash when an abnormal
phone in your building. condition occurs. See Table 21 on page 52 & Table 14 on
• Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor’s page 41 for an explanation of the diagnostic information.
phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions.
Maintenance
• If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire
department. Planned maintenance is the best way to avoid unnecessary
C. Use only your hand to push in or turn the gas control expense and inconvenience. Have this system inspected
knob. Never use tools. If the knob will not push in at regular intervals by a trained and experienced service
or turn by hand, don’t try to repair it, call a qualified technician. The following service intervals are typical for
service technician. Force or attempted repair may average situations but will have to be adjusted to suit your
result in a fire or explosion. particular circumstances.
D. Do not use this appliance if any part has been under
Fuel pressure settings and control settings should be made
water. Immediately call a qualified service technician
to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of only by persons thoroughly experienced with the burner and
the control system and any gas control which has control system, and must not be tampered with by persons
been under water. without such experience.
Always replace covers on burner controls and boxes as the
1. Set the controller to the lowest setting. electrical contacts are sensitive to dust and dirt. Perform
maintenance of controls, gas valves, and other components in
2. Turn off all electric power to the appliance.
accordance with instructions contained in the manufacturer’s
3. This appliance is equipped with an ignition device which bulletins.
automatically lights the burner. Do NOT try to light the
pilot by hand. Monthly
4. Open the control access panel. Check air filters and replace if dirty.
5. Turn the gas control clockwise to “OFF”. Twice Yearly
6. Wait five (5) minutes to clear out any gas. Then, smell 1. Burner Air - Check burner fan wheel for dirt buildup and
for gas, including near the floor. If you smell gas, STOP! lint. Check combustion air intake louver and flue box/vent
Follow step “B” in the DANGER label on this page. If you for dirt buildup and accumulation of wind borne debris.
don’t smell gas, proceed to the next step.
2. Cleaning - Inspect flue tubes and combustion chamber,
7. Turn the gas control counter-clockwise to “ON”. clean as required. Keep burner vestibule clean. Dirt and
8. Close the control access panel. debris can result in burner air blockages.
9. Turn on all electric power to the appliance. Yearly

10. Set controller to full heat. The heater and the venting system shall be inspected once a
11. Verify manifold pressure and rate. year by a qualified service agency
12. If the appliance will not operate, refer to “Turning Off Gas Gas Train - Check all valves, piping and connections for
to the Appliance”, and call a qualified service technician. leakage. Inspect and clean flame rod, ignition electrode, and
burner manifold.
Condensate Pan/Drain - Check pan and drain for
accumulation of debris.

Optional Gas Heat
DPS 003–015 (only) Ignition Control Module for Staged Gas Furnace
Figure 52: Typical Staged Gas Furnace Electrical Schematic with Sensor
Ignition Control Module LED Diagnostics

The following LED indicators can be used to diagnose faults
associated with the staged gas furnace.
Table 21: LED Indicator and Fault Conditions Figure 53: Ignition Control Wiring
L1
Indicator Fault Condition INDUCER
120/240 VAC IND
Steady Off No power or control hardware fault MAIN
GAS VALVE
MV
Steady On Power applied, control OK
PRESSURE SWITCH
PS2
1 Flash Combustion fan motor energized, pressure switch open
PSI
2 Flashes Combustion fan motor off, pressure switch closed
T'STAT LIMIT
W
3 Flashes Ignition lockout from too many trials
FS
Ignition lockout from too many flame losses within single
4 Flashes call for heat R
1016-4XX
5 Flashes Control hardware fault detected X
120VAC 24VAC
C
HIGH
VOLTAGE
COM
BURNER
SENSE
SPARK
GAS
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONTROL WITH POST-PURGE

Optional Gas Heat
DPS 003–015 (only) Ignition Control Module for Modulating Gas Furnace
Figure 54: Typical Modulating Gas Furnace Electrical Schematic with Sensor

Optional Gas Heat
DPS 003–015 (only) Gas Furnace Ignition and Control Troubleshooting

Variable Furnace Controller Modulating Furnace Diagnostics
Daikin’s furnace controller is an electronic device that delivers The Rebel furnace control that operates the furnace has
full control of the modulating furnace. Control includes built-in, self-diagnostic capability. The control continuously
sequencing, ignition, safety, modulation of the control valve, monitors its own operation and the operation of the system.
and the induced draft motor. Inputs to the furnace control board The LED on the control indicates the current system state,
are an a 0-10V signal. The analog signal will modulate the warnings, failures and test modes.
burner down to 25% of full load. Safety inputs include pressure
line and electrical connection from the airflow proofing switch
and electrical connection from the rollout switches. Control
board outputs are to the igniter board, modulating gas valve,
and to the induce draft motor.
VB-1200 Trouble Shooting Guide

Table 22: Furnace I.D. Plug Information (Displayed on Power-up)
Display Information (example) Description
C Furnace series or model name, for example, C cabinet series.
CAb
400 Furnace size in 1000’s of BTU, for example, 400 kBTU.
nAt or LP Burner fuel type, for example, natural gas or LP.
6AS or LP
1.01 Software version, for example, v1.01
Table 23: Normal Furnace Operation

Display Information Mode Description
Off OFF Mode System Idle - Control board has power, no faults found, no call for heat.
System is purging the heat exchanger – No gas on, no flame, inducer runs for the specified purge
PVr PURGE Mode timings. Purge cycles occur immediately before and after each burner operation.
System is initiating burner operation – Igniter energized, modulating valve moved to ignition setting, gas
I9n IGNITION Mode on. Maintained for the trial-for-ignition period and the five second flame stabilization period.
HEA WARM-UP Mode Period between Ignition and Run – System checks completed before modulation control begins.
rVn RUN Mode Normal modulating operation.
System has had a failed ignition attempt or has lost flame during burner operation and is beginning
rEt Ignition Retry another ignition cycle.

Optional Gas Heat
Table 24: Functional Alerts — DPS 003–015 only

Display Information Alert Description Possible Cause Solution
The flame could not be
established during the
trial for ignition period.
Failed ignition attempt This alert indicates the See “” in the See “” in the
AO1 Maximum number of
allowed retries not met
maximum number of
retries has not been
LOCKOUT ERRORS
section.
LOCKOUT ERRORS
section.
exceeded and furnace
operation will continue with
another ignition attempt.
A. Flame sensor coated 1. Clean flame rod sensor.
1. Check flame sensor
B. Flame sensor wiring integrity and
improperly mounted or ceramic for cracks.
grounded 2. Re-install / replace
flame sensor.
1. Check that all burner
assembly components
are properly installed.
2. Check that all seals
between the vestibule
area and the heat
C. Unstable flame pattern exchanger area are
tight.
3. Insure that the
The flame sensor signal combustion door
has been lost after flame gasket is in place and
is established during a the door is properly
call for heating. This alert installed.
AO2 Lost Flame is displayed during the
ignition RECYCLE period
1. Check for faulty gas
valve wiring.
prior to the next ignition
attempt. 2. Check 24 VAC to gas
valve assembly.
D. Insufficient intermediate
gas manifold pressure 3. Check inlet pressure to
through main gas safety gas valve.
safety valve 4. Check outlet pressure
from the safety gas
valve.
5. Replace safety gas
valve if faulty.
1. Check voltage to gas
valve actuator. (2 – 10
E. Insufficient gas manifold VDC depending on
pressure to burner model)
through modulating ball 2. Check alignment and
valve assembly set screw connection
between ball valve and
actuator.
1. Normal operation.
Furnace automatically
A. High altitude operation de-rates for high
altitude conditions
1. Check air inlet and
outlet for blockage.
2. Check venting
B. Partially blocked vent configuration for
Furnace cannot achieve
desired combustion air excessive venting
Insufficient Combustion Air flow due to blockage or length, improper sizing,
AO3 Furnace Functional high altitude operation
resulting in a de-rate of the
etc..
1. Check sensing hose for
furnace. C. Leak in sensing hose cracks, crimps or loose
connections.
1. Check sensing hose for
D. Low Line Voltage cracks, crimps or loose
connections.
1. Insure correct inducer
E. Faulty inducer assembly assembly installed and
functioning properly.

Optional Gas Heat
Table 24 continued: Functional Alerts

1. Insure gas supply is
connected to furnace
A. Low gas line pressure and check for proper
line pressure.
valve wiring.
2. Check 24 VAC to gas
valve assembly.
B. Insufficient intermediate 3. Check inlet pressure to
gas manifold pressure safety gas valve.
through gas safety 4. Check outlet pressure
valve from the safety gas
valve – adjust as
needed.
5. Replace safety gas
valve if faulty.
1. Check for proper
mounting of the burner
assembly.
Automatic adaptive C. Faulty burner operation
program is currently 2. Check burner orifice
limiting the lower range for proper size and
of modulation at avoid blockage.
flame loss at minimum fire
conditions. The alert is 1. Check flame rod wiring
AO4 Limited Low Fire displayed during the run
cycle once a flame-out D. Faulty flame sensor
and connections.
2. Check for proper
condition has triggered the alignment of flame rod.
Limited Low Fire function. 3. Clean flame rod sensor.
This function is reset by
cycling power to the board. 1. Check that the
alignment of the
actuator to the ball
valve is correct. The
ball valve must be in
the fully open position
E. Improper alignment of when the actuator
the modulating actuator is fully energized
and the gas ball valve (“ACTUATOR DRIVE”
= 9.6 VDC or greater).
2. Insure that the set
screw on the actuator
is tightened to the ball
valve stem.
1. Check air inlet and
F. Blocked or improper 2. Check venting
venting configuration for
excessive venting
length, improper sizing,
etc.
A. Flame sensor coated 1. Clean flame rod sensor.
1. Check flame sensor
B. Flame sensor wiring integrity and
improperly mounted or ceramic for cracks.
grounded 2. Re-install / replace
flame sensor.
The flame signal level is 1. Check that all burner

less than optimal for this assembly components
are properly installed.
AO5 Weak Flame Signal furnace. Maintenance
of the flame sensing 2. Check that all seals
components is advised. between the vestibule
area and the heat
C. Unstable flame pattern exchanger area are
tight.
3. Insure that the
combustion door
gasket is in place and
the door is properly
installed.

Optional Gas Heat
Table 25: Lockout Errors — DPS 003–015 only

1. Check 24-volt
transformer for correct
output.
2. Check connections and
A. Faulty transformer wiring to control board
and other components
connected to the 24
volt source.
Ignition board start-up 3. Replace if necessary.
888 Ignition Board Failure checks have detected an
error. 1. Turn off power to
the furnace, wait 30
seconds and turn
power back on. Re-try
B. Faulty control board ignition sequence
and see if the system
responds.
2. Replace control board if
necessary.
1. Insure gas supply is
A. Insufficient gas line connected to furnace
pressure and check for proper
line pressure.
B. Gas valve control turned 1. Turn gas valve to the
“OFF” “ON” position.
1. Check ignition voltage
(115 VAC from board to
C. No spark from direct transformer) and wiring.
spark ignition 2. Check 24 VAC
transformer for DSI
board.
valve wiring.
2. Check 24 VAC to gas
valve assembly.
D. Insufficient intermediate 3. Check inlet pressure to
gas manifold pressure safety gas valve.
through gas safety 4. Check outlet pressure
valve from the safety gas
valve – adjust as
The flame could not be needed.
established during multiple
Failed Ignition trial-for-ignition periods. 5. Replace safety gas
valve if faulty.
EO1 Maximum Retries
Exceeded
The maximum number of
retries has been exceeded 1. Check voltage to gas
and the furnace is in a valve actuator. (7 – 10
lock-out condition. VDC depending on
E. Insufficient gas manifold model)
pressure to burner 2. Check alignment and
through modulating ball set screw connection
valve assembly between ball valve
and actuator (See
Modulating Gas Valve
Alignment procedure).
1. Check spark rod
assembly for proper
location, spark gap, etc.
2. Check for proper
F. Burners do not light mounting of the burner
assembly.
3. Check burner orifice
for proper size and
blockage.
1. Check flame rod wiring
G. Burners light and and connections.
remain lit for about 5 2. Check for proper
seconds alignment of flame rod.
3. Clean flame rod sensor.

Optional Gas Heat
Table 25 continued: Lockout Errors

1. Check filter / replace if
dirty.
2. Check for improperly
A. Improper circulating sized duct system.
airflow 3. Check for faulty blower
motor.
4. Check for faulty blower
The control board safety motor wiring.
fuse has blown or the 1. Check for an open
primary temperature limit B. Primary limit switch
Primary Limit / Fuse primary limit switch at
EO2 Failure has opened indicating safe
operating temperatures
failure ambient temperature.
for this furnace have been 1. Check and replace fuse
exceeded. on the board.
C. Fuse is blown 2. Make sure fuse socket
is tight, crimp fuse
terminals if necessary.
1. Check primary limit
D. Faulty primary limit wiring continuity from
switch wiring the switch to the control
board.
1. Insure wiring is
connected per unit
wiring diagram.
A. Faulty modulation valve 2. Check for loose pins or
actuator wiring bad connections.
3. Check for frayed wiring
The control lost the or shorts to ground.
position feedback from
EO3 Modulation Valve Failure the modulating gas valve
actuator.
1. Insure actuator has 24
V power.
2. Insure actuator is
receiving valid drive
B. Modulation valve signal from the control
actuator failure board (2 – 10 VDC).
3. Check for actuator
feedback to the control
board (2 – 10 VDC).
1. Check pressure switch
The air sensor reading wiring.
is too low for operating A. Faulty wiring or 2. Check inducer wiring.
conditions or the air connections 3. Check for plugged or
Air Sensor Failure pressure switch closed disconnected vacuum
EO4 Pressure Sensor Reading
Low
when the sensor indicates
low flow.
hoses.
The pressure switch MUST 1. Replace pressure

B. Faulty pressure switch
be open prior to inducer switch.
activation. C. Faulty pressure sensor, 1. Replace board.
located on the board
1. Check pressure switch
wiring.
A. Faulty wiring or hose 2. Check inducer wiring.
connections 3. Check for broken or
The air sensor reading is disconnected vacuum
too high when the inducer hoses.
is off or the air pressure
Air Sensor Failure 1. Check air inlet and
switch open when the
EO5 Pressure Sensor Reading
High
sensor indicates high flow.
The pressure switch MUST
2. Check venting
B. Blocked or improper
close to initiate an ignition venting configuration for
sequence. excessive venting
length, improper sizing,
etc.
1. Replace pressure
C. Faulty pressure switch switch.

Optional Gas Heat
Table 25 continued: Lockout Errors

1. Perform Modulating System
A. Modulating actuator / ball Gas Valve Alignment
valve not properly aligned procedure as defined in the
service manual.
1. Insure line pressure is
properly adjusted for the
B. Line pressure too low
gas and application. Correct
The gas sensor reading is too as necessary.
low compared to the expected
value for the modulating gas 1. Insure the safety gas valve(s)
valve actuator position. are properly adjusted to the
Gas Sensor Failure C. Intermediate regulated
EO6 Pressure Sensor Reading Low
When the furnace is operating
at 75% or higher – greater than
pressure too low
specified outlet pressure.
Adjust per the installation
instructions as necessary.
8 VDC analog input voltage –
the manifold pressure sensor
must read 1.4” w.c. or higher 1. Insure the proper gas sensor
D. Wrong gas pressure sensor – either Natural Gas or LP
installed – is installed. Replace as
needed.
1. Insure gas sensor is installed
properly and wired per
E. Gas pressure sensor faulty
the unit wiring diagram.
Replace as necessary.
1. Perform Modulating System
A. Modulating actuator / ball Gas Valve Alignment
valve not properly aligned procedure as defined in the
service manual.
1. Insure line pressure is
properly adjusted for the
B. Line pressure too high
gas and application. Correct
The gas sensor reading is too as necessary.
high compared to the expected
value for the modulating gas 1. Insure the safety gas valve(s)
valve actuator position. are properly adjusted to the
Gas Sensor Failure C. Intermediate regulated
EO7 Pressure Sensor Reading High
When the furnace is operating
at 75% or lower – less than 8
pressure too high
specified outlet pressure.
Adjust per the installation
instructions as necessary.
VDC analog input voltage – the
manifold pressure sensor must
read 2.8" w.c. or lower 1. Insure the proper gas sensor
D. Wrong gas pressure sensor – either Natural Gas or LP
installed – is installed. Replace as
needed.
1. Insure gas sensor is installed
properly and wired per
E. Gas pressure sensor faulty
the unit wiring diagram.
Replace as necessary
1. Gas valve leaks - check
wiring to remove continuous
Control senses flame present 24V to gas valve.
A. Flame remains lit in “Off”
EO8 Improper Flame Signal when the gas valve is
commanded off.
cycle 2. Gas valve is stuck open –
remove, repair or replace
gas valve.
1. Insure wiring is connected
per unit wiring diagram.
A. Faulty wiring into the “Analog 2. Check for loose pins or bad
+” and “Analog –“ terminals connections.
Call for heat is sensed (R & W 3. Check for frayed wiring or
closed) but firing rate is below shorts to ground.
EO9 No Firing Rate Input
defined voltage threshold for
furnace operation. 1. Check firing rate input
voltage – must be greater
than 1.5 VDC.
B. No signal from source.
2. Troubleshoot controller
providing firing rate input to
the VB-1200 control board.
1. Insure I.D. plug is correct for
the furnace – check label.
2. Insure I.D. plug is properly
inserted into the mating
connector on the control
board.
The installed I.D. plug is not
Eid Invalid I.D. Plug
valid for this control board.
A. Incorrect I.D. plug installed 3. With the I.D. plug installed,
cycle power to the furnace.
The board will display the
I.D. plug identity upon
power-up.
4. Install correct I.D. plug as
needed.

Optional Gas Heat
DPS 016–028 Gas Furnace Ignition Troubleshooting
Table 26: 300/450/600 MBH Staged Ignition Control Troubleshooting Guide (UTEC 1016 Ignition Board)
LED Indicator System Status Fault Description Possible Causes and Corrective Action
Steady ON System Normal N/A N/A
1. Check 120V is being supplied to heater transformer.
LED OFF Lockout LED is OFF 2. Check that 24 VAC is being supplied by transformer. Replace transformer if not being
supplied 24 VAC.
1. Check air pressure switch hose and hose connection between switch and fan.
Combustion air pressure switch contact 2. Check reset switch is not tripped for rollout switch(s).
1 Flashes Lockout is open with inducer fan running. 3. Check high limit switch is not open
4. Replace pressure switch if contact does not close when fan is running.
1. Check wiring between PS1 and PS2 on ignition control board for correct connection
Combustion air pressure switch contact and proper wiring.
2 Flashes Lockout is closed when inducer fan is not 2. Check pressure switch functions correctly with and without pressure.
running.
3. Replace pressure switch if fails to function correctly.
1. Verify gas supply is present.
2. Verify gas safety valve is working correctly.
Ignition locked out from too many 3. Verify gas manifold pressure is adequate and correct.
3 Flashes Lockout ignition attempts 4. Check spark igniter is not cracked or dirty. Check spark igniter wire is not covered
with oil and debris or cracked. Check wire is connected correctly.
5. Check flame sensor wiring. Check to see if flame sensor is grounded.
1. Check pressure switch hose for leaks or poor connection
2. Check for condensate in pressure switch hose.
Ignition lockout from too many flame
4 Flashes Lockout 3. Check pressure tap on combustion blower and combustion pressure switch for
losses within a single heat.
blockage.
4. Check functionality of combustion inducer fan.
5 Flashes Lockout Control hardware fault detected 1. Change ignition board.
Table 27: Modulating Control LED Status Indicator

LED Indicator PCB Label Color Functionality Description
Main Power PWR Blue Light ON: Controller has received a call for heat and is powered.
AFS AFS Green Light ON: Combustion Inducer Blower is running
Light ON: Controller has received signal that ignition has commenced and gas modulating valve has moved to 66% open
Start Up SU Yellow position. Valve will be held at this position for 30 seconds to insure burner ignition is stable.
Modulation MOD Green Modulating section is operational and modulating
Relay 1 Relay 1 is energized and combustion inducer blower is operating at low speed.
R1 Red
(energized) NOTE: When Relay 1 is not energized combustion inducer fan has permissive to operate at high speed.
Relay 2 is energized and Non-modulating (Staged) gas train is operational. 1st coil of two stage gas safety valve is
Relay 2 energized.
R2 Red
(energized)
NOTE: When R2 LED is on the two stage gas safety valve is at low fire.
Relay 3 is energized and Non-modulating (Staged) gas train is operational. 2nd coil of two stage gas safety valve is
Relay 3 energized.
R2 Red
(energized)
NOTE: When both R2 & R3 LED are on the two stage gas safety valve is at high fire.

Optional Gas Heat
Rebel C 300 MBH Gas Furnace Electrical Schematic
2 300
Figure 55: Typical 2 Stage Control Gas Furnace, Stage Control
MBH — DPS 016–028 shown
P1-1/L1 P1-2/L2 P1-3/GND

600
601
T01
TB10 602A TB10
602B TB10
602 115VAC
101 102 GND
T3
603 Class II
40VA
604A 604B TB10
604 24VAC
GND
605
606
Ignition Module #1
IM01
607
UTEK 1016-575
604A 608A
608 X COM
Gas Safety Shutoff Valve #1
GSSV01
609
HW VR8305Q Vlv (for NG)
HW VR8205Q Vlv (for LPG)
610 C Air Pressure Switch
PS01
611A 611B 611C
611 C PS1
612A 612B
612 2/A HI LO MV
Roll-out Roll-out
613
Switch #2 Switch #1
614B TS04 614C
TS03
614 PS2
615
616
Flame Sensor
617A 617B FS01
617 1/A W FS
618
Hi-Limit Aux Hi-Limit
619 Switch Switch Spark Igniter
620A
TS02 TS01 620D SI01
620B 620C
620 R/A R HV
(Daikin P/N 910172859; includes ignitor and wire)
remotely
621 mounted
Inducer Fan Motor
IFM01
622
602C 623A 602D

623 L1 IND MTR
624
LED Diagnostic Information

Steady Off: No power or Control hardware fault
Steady On: Power applied, Control OK
1 Flash: Combustion fan motor energized, Pressure switch open
2 Flashes: Combustion fan motor off, Pressure switch closed
3 Flashes: Ignition lockout from too many trials
4 Flashes: Ignition lockout from too many flame losses within single call for heat
5 Flashes: Control hardware fault detected

Rebel C 450/600 MBH Gas Furnace Electrical Schematic
2 Stage Control Optional Gas Heat
Figure 56: Typical 2 Stage Control Gas Furnace, 450/600 MBH — DPS 016–028 shown
P1-1/L1 P1-2/L2 P1-3/GND
600
601
T01
TB10 602A TB10 TB10
602B
602 115VAC
101 102 GND
T3
603 Class II
40VA
604A 604B TB10
604 24VAC
GND
605
606
Ignition Module #1
IM01
607
UTEK 1016-575
604A 608A
608 X COM
609 GSSV01
HW VR8205Q Vlv (for LPG)
610 C Air Pressure Switch
PS01
611A TB10 611B 611C 611D
611 C PS1
103
612A 612C 612D
612 2/A HI LO
TB10
105 Gas Safety Shutoff Valve #2 Roll-out Roll-out
613 GSSV02 Switch #2 Switch #1
HW VR8205Q Vlv (for LPG) TB10 614A 614B TS04 614C
TS03
614 C MV PS2
104
615A
615
612B 616A
616 HI LO
Flame Sensor
617A 617B FS01
617 1/A W FS
618
Hi-Limit Aux Hi-Limit

619 Switch Switch Spark Igniter
620A
TS02 TS01 620D SI01
620B 620C
620 R/A R HV
remotely
621 mounted
Inducer Fan Motor
IFM01
622
602C 623A 602D

623 L1 IND MTR
624


Optional Gas Heat
Rebel C 300/450/600 MBH Gas Furnace Electrical Schematic

4 Stage
Figure 57: Typical 4 Stage Control Gas Furnace, Control
300/450/600 MBH — DPS 016–028 shown
600 P1-1/L1 P1-2/L2 P1-3/GND
601 T01
TB10 602A 602B TB10 TB10
602 115VAC
101 102 GND
T3
603 Class II
40VA
604A 604B
604 Aux Hi-Limit Switch 24VAC
Hi-Limit Switch 1R
TB10 605A TS01 605B TS02 605C TB10 604E TB10
605D
605 103 A1 A2 105 GND
606 Roll-out Switch #1 Roll-out Switch #2 Air Pressure Switch

TS03 TS04 PS01 2R
TB10 607A 607B 607C 607D 607E TB10
607
103 A1 A2 105
608 Ignition Module #1

IM01
609 UTEK 1016-575
TB10 610A 610B TB10
610
602C
X COM
104 106
611
GSSV01
612
2R-1
613B
602D
613A 613C
613 PS1
11 14
C
614
C
HW VR8305Q Valve (for NG)
615 HW VR8205Q Valve (for LPG)
616A HI 616B
616 2/A LO MV PS2
617
610D
618 Flame Sensor
FS01
619A 619B
619 1/A W FS
620
621 1R-1 Spark Igniter

S101
622A 622B 622C
622 R/A R HV
11 14 (Daikin P/N 910172859; includes ignitor and wire)
623 Inducer Fan Motor
IFM01
624
602C 625A 602D
625 L1 IND MTR
626
627 Ignition Module #2

IM02
GSSV02
628 UTEC 1016-578
629A 610D
629 C COM
610C
630 C
631 HW VR8205Q Valve (for LPG) Flame Sensor
632A 632B 632C FS02
632 2/B HI LO MV FS
633
634 Spark Igniter

635A 635B S102
635 1/B W1 HV

636
1R-2 2R-2
637A 637B
637 R/B
21 24 21 24
638
639
640


Optional Gas Heat
Rebel C 300/450/600 MBH Gas Furnace Electrical Schematic

Modulating
Figure 58: Typical Modulating Control Control
Gas Furnace, 300/450/600 MBH — DPS 016–028 shown
600 P1-1/L1 P1-3/GND P1-2/L2
601
TB10
602 GND
T01
TB10 603A 603B TB10
603 101
115VAC
102
T3
604 Class II
40VA
605A 605B
605 Aux Hi-Limit Switch Hi-Limit Switch
24VAC
2R TB10
TB10 606A TS01 606B TS02 606C 606D 606E TB10
606
103 A1 A2 108 GND
607 Roll-out Switch #1 Roll-out Switch #2 3R

TB10 608A TS03 608B TS04 608C 608D TB10
608 103 A1 A2 108
Air Pressure Switch, High PSH
609
4R
TB10 610A 610B 610C TB10
610 109
103 Ignition Module #1 A1 A2
Air Pressure Switch, Low IM01
611 PSL
UTEK 1016-575
TB10 612A 612B TB10
612 X COM
104 109
627A
GSSV01
613
614 C
615A 615B
615 C PS1
616
617 HW VR8205Q Valve (for LPG) 3R-1 4R-1
618A 618B 618C 618D 618E 616B

618 HI LO MV PS2
TB10
11 14 11 14
105
619
620 2R-1 Flame Sensor

621A 621B 621C FS01
621 1/A W FS
11 14
622
623 Spark Igniter

624A 624B S101
624 R/A R HV
625
Inducer Fan Motor
626 1R-1
(Hi speed) IFM01
627A 627B 627C
627 L1 IND
11 12
603C
628 1R-2
MTR
629A
629
618A TB10 633B 11 14
630 (Low speed)
105
631 Maxitrol Controller

MC01
632
TB10 633A T2 T15 633B
633 104 (24VAC) EST
634 Maxitrol SC30-SM2N Controller (for NG)

Maxitrol Modulating Gas Valve Maxitrol SC30-SM2L Controller (for LPG)
MGV01
635 Maxitrol M520B Mod Gas Valve (for NG)
Maxitrol M520BH Mod Gas Valve (for LPG) 636A T3 T11 636B
636 (Mod) (NO)
+
637
638
T9 5R
639A T4 (NO) 639B 639C TB10
639 (Mod)
A1 A2 109
-
640
641
1R
642A T12 T7 642B 642C TB10
642 +/A
(+) (NO) 110
A1 A2
643
605A
644
645A T13 645B TB10
T1
645 - /A
(-) (com) 110
646
647
648 GSSV02
Ignition Module 2
649 C UTEC 1016-578
650A 650B
C COM
650
651 HW VR8305Q Valve (for NG)

HW VR8205Q Valve (for LPG)
652 Flame Sensor
5R-1 FS02
636B 653A 653B 653C
653 HI LO MV FS
11 14
654
655 2R-2 3R-2 4R-2 5R-2 W1

Spark Igniter
S102
605A 656A 656B 656C 656D 656E
656 HV
21 24 21 24 21 24 21 24 (Daikin P/N 910172861; includes ignitor and wire)
LED Ignition Module Diagnostic Information LED Modulating Control Status

PWR (blue): Main Power
SU (yellow): Start Up
R1 (red): Relay 1 energized
AFS (green): AFS (Air Flow Switch)
MOD (green): Modulation

Optional Hot Water Heat
Optional Hot Water Heat
Hot Water Heater Design

Figure 59: Hot Water Heating Schematic
CAUTION
Coil freeze possible. Can damage equipment.
Follow instructions for mixing antifreeze solution. Some
products have higher freeze points in natural state than
when mixed with water. The freezing of coils is not the
responsibility of Daikin Applied.
If the 10th digit of the model number is a “W”, the rooftop unit
was furnished with a factory installed hot water coil (Example:
DPS010AHCW). The hot water coil comes with a piping Field Installed Freeze Stats
vestibule for field supplied and installed control valve and Field installed freeze stats can be added. The freeze stat
piping. The coil is furnished with ODM copper connections. contacts should be wired to the MicroTech III digital input X5
The Rebel commercial rooftop units are available with a low as shown in . MicroTech III will turn the fans OFF, shut the
heat (one row coil) or a high heat (two row coil) configuration (3 outdoor air damper, open the valve and issue an alarm when
rows also offered on DPS 016–028). the normally closed contact opens between terminals 111 and
Hot water coils are not recommended for use with entering 112.
air temperatures less than 40°F (4°C). No control system can Field Installed Freeze Stat Schematic
guarantee a 100% safeguard against coil freeze up. Glycol TB2 TB2 EXPD
solutions or brines are the only freeze-safe media for operation 160A
111
MJ
Freezestat 112
160A
DI1
of water coils at low entering air temperatures. (160) / 120V_N

155A
R1
See certified drawings for the recommended piping entrance X5-AO

locations. Seal all piping penetrations to prevent air and water
leakage.
NOTE: Factory installed piping is copper. Dissimilar metal
within the plumbing system can cause galvanic
corrosion. To avoid corrosion, provide proper di-
electric fittings as well as appropriate water treatment.
Table 28: Heating Capacity and Water Pressure Drop – Hot Water Coils
Unit MBH GPM WPD Connection Size
3 61.4 6.1 1.0 1.375 Sweat
4 72.9 7.3 1.4 1.375 Sweat
5 82.6 8.2 1.7 1.375 Sweat
6 91.6 9.2 2.2 1.375 Sweat
7.5 149.7 15.0 3.1 1.375 Sweat
10 176.9 17.8 4.2 1.375 Sweat
12 195.9 19.6 5.1 1.375 Sweat
15 221.4 22.1 6.4 1.375 Sweat
16 347 35.5 0.7 1.375 Sweat
18 376 38.4 1.2 1.375 Sweat
20 403 41.1 1.3 1.375 Sweat
25 464 47.3 1.4 1.375 Sweat
28 497 50.7 1.6 1.375 Sweat
Nominal airflow, 60°EAT, approximately 180°–160° water. WPD does not include a field supplied valve pressure drop. 2-row performance shown, 1-row coil also available.

Optional Energy Recovery Wheel
System Description
When a unit is equipped with an optional enthalpy wheel, energy Purge - A small segment of supply air defined by the gap
recovery is provided by drawing outside air across half of the between the inner seal on the outdoor air edge of the center
enthalpy wheel and drawing exhaust air across the other half. post and the supply air edge of the center post. The purge angle
Latent heat and sensible heat are transferred from the hotter is adjustable. The purge captures the small amount of supply air
and moist exhaust air to the colder and dry outside air during captive in the enthalpy wheel when the wheel moves from return
winter conditions. Latent heat and sensible heat are transferred to supply and routes it to return to minimize cross contamination.
from the hotter and moist outside air to the cooler and dry Return air - The air stream that is returned from the building.
exhaust air during summer conditions. Energy recovery control Return air becomes exhaust air after going through the enthalpy
consists of starting and stopping an exhaust fan, modulating wheel.
the speed of the exhaust fan, starting and stopping an enthalpy
wheel, optionally controlling the speed of the enthalpy wheel Rotor - The part of an enthalpy wheel that performs the energy
and opening and closing a set of bypass dampers. The outdoor exchange and consists of the wheel media, hub, spokes and
dampers are controlled in the normal manner. band.
Sensible heat - Sensible energy, in the context of enthalpy
Definitions
wheel discussion, is the work done by the enthalpy wheel to
The following are descriptions of various components related transfer heat from one air stream to another. Sensible work is
to the enthalpy wheel construction (Figure 60): accompanied by temperature changes in the air stream.
Bearing, external - The wheel and bearing rotate on the shaft, Supply air - The air stream that is supplied to the building
no field lubrication is required. space. Supply air is outdoor air that has been run through the
Brush seal - The seal used for both the circumferential seal enthalpy wheel.
and the inner seal in the cassettes. They are constructed of
nylon brush and configured to seal against the enthalpy wheel Arrangements
band in the case of the circumferential seal, and against the
Two arrangements are offered for the enthalpy wheel:
wheel face in the case of the inner seal. These seals are full
contact seals, have an integral clip, and they are clipped to the 1. Single enthalpy wheel with economizer and bypass
cassette face panel cutout (circumferential) or to the (inner) (Figure 60). This arrangement is available for all units.
post. 2. Single enthalpy wheel without economizer (100%
Cassette - The steel structure that houses the rotor. Cassettes outdoor air unit).
are of punched sheet metal panel construction.
Wheel Construction
Enthalpy wheel - A generic name for an energy conservation
wheel. The term “enthalpy” refers to an air stream’s total Your Daikin enthalpy wheel is delivered completely assembled
energy (temperature and humidity level). and ready to run. The wheel is built to provide many years of
trouble free service following proper installation and performance
Exhaust air - The air stream that is exhausted to the outside. of the minimal maintenance requirements.
Exhaust air is building return air that has been run through the
enthalpy wheel.
Heat wheel - Synonymous with an enthalpy wheel, energy
conservation wheel, or total energy recovery wheel. Some heat
wheels are sensible only wheels and should not be confused
with Daikin total energy recovery wheels.
Hub - The center support of an enthalpy wheel.
Latent energy - Latent energy, in the context of enthalpy wheel
discussions, is the work done by the wheel to transfer moisture
from one air stream to another. Latent work is accompanied by
humidity changes in the air streams.
Media - The chemical composite part of the enthalpy wheel
which actually performs the latent and sensible exchange.
Outdoor air - The air stream that is brought in from the outside.
Outdoor air becomes supply air after going through the enthalpy
wheel.

Figure 60: Wheel Construction (Side-by-Side)
(1) Currently, only the Over-Under configuration is offered on Daikin rooftop systems and air handlers.
Purge and Pressurization Drive Motor

Pressurization is critical to minimize crossover from exhaust to The enthalpy wheel comes standard with a constant speed drive
supply and to allow the purge to operate. motor which is pre-wired to turn in the proper direction.
Frost Protection Option

Figure 61: Purge and Pressurization
Outside Air at
During extremely cold winter conditions, exhaust air stream To
Atmospheric Pressure Supply Air circumvent this possibility, Daikin offers three factory installed frost
protection options with the MicroTech III system.
Any leakage must occur Defrost ON/OFF Control (Standard)
from outside to Exhaust Air Adjustable Purge
due to pressure gradient (See Detail) With this method the enthalpy wheel is stopped periodically for a
defrost time duration when the outdoor air temperature is below
Exhaust Air an outdoor frost temperature threshold setpoint.
Figure 63: Frost Prevention Psychrometric Chart
Saturated
Plenum Exhaust Fan Air
draws a negative pressure NOTE:
Maintain the pressure gradient to Frost
prevent cross contamination from the Conditions
Exhaust to Outside Supply Air Saturated
Temperature
Humidity
Figure 62: Purge Detail Ratio
No Frost
Adjust purge in this Conditions
direction to decrease
OUTSIDE AIR capacity and increase
purge
Saturated
Air
Dry Bulb
EXHAUST AIR

Constant Speed Frost Prevention Variable Speed Frequency Control

When there is a threat of frost on the enthalpy wheel, the wheel A variable frequency drive is included with the frost protection
is jogged so that less enthalpy transfer occurs and frosting option and it controls the speed of the enthalpy wheel. The
of the wheel is avoided. Frosting can occur on the enthalpy unit has also been programmed for the recommended range
wheel when the exhaust air leaving the wheel is saturated. This of wheel speed operation. Typical wheel speed is 45 RPM, but
condition occurs when two lines intersect on a psychrometric the programming can allow for wheel speeds above or below
chart, and it does not occur when these two lines do not 45 RPM. Check all factory settings to make sure they are
intersect (see Figure 63). consistent with the application.
Variable Speed Frost Prevention Enthalpy wheel speed will be controlled by exhaust
temperature measurement.
When there is a threat of frost on the enthalpy wheel, the
wheel is slowed down so that less enthalpy transfer occurs Slide-Out Wheel
and frosting of the wheel is avoided. Frosting can occur on
The wheel can be pulled out to facilitate cleaning and servicing
the enthalpy wheel when the exhaust air leaving the wheel is
(Figure 64). Unplug the control wires before sliding the wheel
saturated. This condition occurs when two lines intersect on
out of position.
a psychrometric chart, and it does not occur when these two
lines do not intersect (see Figure 63).
Figure 64: Slide-Out Energy Recovery Wheel
Energy Recovery Exhaust Hoods
Units with the optional energy recovery section have one
or two (depending on model) exhaust hoods. Each hood is
shipped in three pieces, consisting of one top and tow sides.
Install exhaust hood over the barometric relief dampers by
installing tow sides first and then install the top.

Optional Outdoor Air Monitor
Thermal Dispersion Airflow Measurement Technology

Thermal dispersion technology relates the velocity of the air Connecting to MicroTech III Controllers
to the power and rise in temperature of a heated element in a Wiring
moving airstream. A precise bead-in glass thermistor probes
the airflow rate and air temperature. Multiple sensing points are 1. Connect analog control wires from the MicroTech III
used to produce an average velocity for true volumetric airflow Controller to the outdoor air monitor controller.
(CFM/LPS). Each individual sensor node is calibrated to NIST a. MicroTech III controller (X1 on the MCB or X11 on the
traceable airflow standards at 16 points, resulting in a accuracy EXP_D) to the controller's analog output terminal 1.
of 2% of the reading.
b. MicroTech III controller (M on the MCB or M on the
EXP_D) to the controller's analog output terminal
Figure 65: Bead-in-Glass Thermistor COM.
Thermistor material
designed for self-heat 2. Power Wires (24 VAC) to the outdoor air monitor
applications is fused
to dumet wire leads controller.
Thermistor aging
process ensures
long term stability a. 24VAC from the unit control panel to the controller
terminals L1 and L2.
Dumet wire ensures
hermetically sealed
glass encapsulation Outdoor air monitor controller settings
1. Set Controller SW1 switch to Vdc.
Kynar® coated wires are

2. Set power switch to ON.
Waterproof potting
welded to dumet leads compound protects
assembly from the Outdoor air monitor controller configuration/set up
environment
(see Appendix, Figure 87 on page 119 for navigating the
Controller keypad)
1. Set LCD1 U/M to "CFM"
Figure 66: Bead-in-Glass Thermistor Probe
2. Set AR1 (see Table 29)
3. Set OUT1 U/M =CFM
4. Set OUT1 =0–10V
Zero Power Thermistor

5. Set FSI (see Table 29)
Table 29: Settings by Cabinet Size

Heat transferred to
Approaching the airstream is Area sq.ft. Full scale output CFM
Airstream proportional to the Model Unit Size
airflow rate (AR1) (FS1)
003–006 Small cabinet 2.25 2,400
007–015 Medium cabinet 4.5 6,000
Self-heated Thermistor 016–028 Large Cabinet 10.25 11.0

Figure 67: MicroTech III Controller
Figure 68: Transmitter and Connector Detail
Transmitter
Connector

Changing the System of Units Altitude Correction Adjustment

The transmitter is provided with the system of units set to I-P. The Altitude Correction Adjustment allows for correction of
To change to S.I., simultaneously press and release the “UP” airflow readings at the installed site altitude and more precise
and “DOWN” arrow buttons during normal operation. “IP/SI readings regardless on installed altitude. Refer to the SETUP
UNITS” will be indicated on the LCD display. Press “ENTER” MENUS of Figure 88 for the *ALT= menu item, and set this
three times and use the “UP” and “DOWN” arrow buttons until vale to the installation altitude.
the system of units desired is indicated. Press the “ENTER”
button to select changes then press “ESC” twice to return to Adjusting The Digital Output Filter
the normal operating mode. See Appendix, Figure 83 on page The digital output filter is useful for dampening signal
114. fluctuations resulting from transient wind gusts on outdoor
air intakes or excessive turbulence generated from duct
LCD Display Notifications disturbances. The digital output filter range can be set between
Following a brief initialization at power up, the LCD display 0 (OFF) and 99%. Increasing the filter percentage limits the
automatically displays airflow and temperature as all upper allowable change of the output signal. To change the amount
case (caps) characters. The display provides additional of filtering, enter the Setup menu and set “*FILTER1={desired
information on system status and alarm conditions as follows: value}” as shown in Figure 88.
Last LCD Character Shown in Lower Case (Probe IMPORTANT

Malfunction)
Fluctuations in the airflow output signal are normal.
If the last character of the flow rate units on the LCD display is Laboratory research indicates that dampening true
lower case (for example FPm or CFm), this indicates that an fluctuations will result in poor control and a larger dead-
improper/malfunctioning probe is connected to the transmitter. band of operation. Therefore, the use of the dampening
All LCD Characters Shown in Lower Case filters in control devices is not recommended. Warnings
indicate potentially hazardous situations, which can
When all characters of the flow rate units are displayed in lower result in property damage, severe personal injury, or
case (for example cfm) the transmitter is operating in the Field death if not avoided.
Calibration Wizard mode.Daikin McQuay users do not need to
use this function.
LCD Blinks ** LOW ALARM **, ** HIGH ALARM ** or **

TRBL ALARM**
The LCD will alternately flash to indicate an active alarm
condition for the type of alarm that has been set. The LCD
displays airflow/temperature readings between the alarm
notifications. Alarm will cease when the alarm is cleared.
Converting the Analog Output Signal from FPM to

CFM (MPS to LPS for SI units scaling)
The transmitter is shipped from the factory with analog output
“OUTPUT 1” set to indicate velocity in FPM. To automatically
convert this analog velocity output to volumetric flow (CFM or
LPS), simply set the *OUT1 U/M from FPM (default) to CFM
in the Setup Menu (See Appendix, Figure 81 on page 110). If
you wish to manually convert the velocity output to volumetric
flow (CFM or LPS), simply multiply the indicated output
velocity (in FPM or MPS) by the free area of the air flow probe
installation location (free area × 1000 for SI units when area
is calculated in square meters). For -P sensors, the total free
area is programmed into the probe at the factory and is printed
on the probe hang-tag. For -F and -B sensor probes, determine
the free area following installation in accordance with the
installation guidelines.
NOTE: The full scale analog output (OUTPUT1 ) value is
determined by the FS1 setting within the SETUP
MENU.

Table 30: General Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Remedy
Power switch not in the "ON" position. Move the power switch to the "ON" position.
Ensure that 24VAC power is connected to L1 and L2
Improper supply voltage to the power input terminal of the POWER terminal block and that the voltage
No LCD display indication and the green Transmitter block. with the power switch in the "ON" position is between
Status LED (D3) on the main circuit board is not 22.8 and 26.4 VAC.
illuminated.
Check power wiring. Ensure that multiple devices
wired on a single transformer are wired "in-phase".
Blown fuse. Replace fuse only with a 1.5 amp, fast-acting fuse
after the problem has been identified and corrected.
No LCD display indication and the green Transmitter Turn “Contrast” potentiometer on the main circuit
LCD contrast too low.
Status LED (D3) on the main circuit board is flashing. board "clockwise".
The LCD display is scrambled or there is no LCD Touch an earth-grounded object, such as a duct, to
display indication after touching the switches, LCD Static electricity. discharge static electricity then reset the power. Avoid
display or circuit board. direct contact with the LCD display or circuit board.
The power switch on the transmitter was moved to Reset 24VAC power by moving the power switch from
The LCD display indicates "No Probes". the "ON" position before the sensor probes were the "ON" to "OFF" position and then back to the "ON"
connected. position.
Transmitters must have the same sensor type
The LCD display indicates "DiffSensor Type". Sensor probes have been mismatched. connected (GP1, GF1 or GB1 sensor probes).
A probe with 5 or more sensors has been connected Probes with 5 or more sensors are shipped with and
The LCD display indicates "Too Many Sensors". to a 'Type B' transmitter with 4 receptacles. require a 'Type A' transmitter with 2 receptacles.
Check sensor probe cable connections. If sensor
The last digit of the flow rate unit is displayed as a The sensor detection system has detected one or probe connections look OK and match the number of
lower case letter. (When the Field Calibration Wizard more malfunctioning or missing sensors. sensor probes indicated on each probe’s hang tag.
is engaged, the last character of the flow rate units is
displayed as an upper case letter. A probe with 5 or more sensors has been connected Probes with 5 or more sensors are shipped with and
to a 'Type B' transmitter with 4 receptacles. require a 'Type A' transmitter with 2 receptacles.
Reset 24VAC power by moving the power switch from
The green Transmitter Status LED (D3) on the main The microprocessor is not running. the "ON" to "OFF" position and then back to the "ON"
circuit board is "ON" but not flashing. position.
The green Transmitter Status LED (D3) on the main No problem, normal operation. No remedy required.
circuit board is flashing at 1-second intervals.
The sensor detection system has detected one or probe connections look OK and match the number of
The green Transmitter Status LED (D3) on the main more malfunctioning or missing sensors. sensor probes indicated on each probe's hang tag.
circuit board is flashing at 2-second intervals.
Sensors are sensitive and can measure very low air Do not attempt to adjust zero ("offset"). Doing so will
The transmitter indicates airflow when the HVAC velocities. If a reading is indicated, there is airflow result in an error in airflow measurement. The Low
system is not operating. present where the airflow measuring station is Limit airflow cutoff value can be set to force the output
located. signal to zero.
Turn the transmitter power "OFF", and then press the
Output card is not securely mounted on main circuit output card firmly onto main circuit board. Turn the
board. transmitter power back "ON".
Make sure that power has not been connected to
the output terminal block. Correct the problem and
replace with 0.125 amp, fast acting fuse only.
No output signal can be measured at the OUTPUT Blown output fuse (output 1 and output 2 are fused Make sure that the host control system is not
terminal block of the transmitter. and protected independently on the transmitter). configured for a 2-wire device (no excitation voltage
should be present on the signals from the host
controls). Correct the problem and replace with 0.125
amp, fast acting fuse only.
The Low Limit airflow cutoff value is above the actual Decrease the Low Limit airflow cutoff value in the
airflow reading. Setup menu until it is below the actual airflow reading.
The output signal wiring must be shielded. Individually
The output signal on the transmitter fluctuates while ground one or more of the following points: the signal
Electrical interference from other devices is creating
the flow and/or temperature readings on the LCD are wire shield at host controls; signal wire shield at the
noise in the signal wires to the host control system.
steady. transmitter, or L2 of the power terminal block of the
transmitter.
Compare the current configuration of the transmitter
The LCD display does not match the readings with that of the host control system. Compare the
The scaling in the host control system is incorrect.
indicated by the host control system. minimum and full scale settings for each output by
navigating through the Setup menu.

Table 31: Transmitter Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Remedy
Turn the transmitter power "OFF" and press the
Output card is not securely mounted on main circuit output card firmly onto main circuit board. Turn the
board. transmitter power back "ON".
Verify that the network signal wires from the host
controls are connected to the proper terminals of the
Network signal wiring is not properly connected to the OUTPUT block. On the transmitter OUTPUT terminal
transmitter or the host controls. block, NET+ is for A, NET- is for B and COM for
The host control system is unable to communicate common.
with the transmitter.
Network protocol is not properly set on the transmitter. Set network protocol based on the network
requirements and reset transmitter power.
Set address based on network requirements and
Network address is not properly set on the transmitter. reset transmitter power. The address must be unique
for the network.
Network termination is not properly set on the Set transmitter termination based on network
transmitter. requirements and reset the transmitter power.
Compare the value of the Area or K factor of the
The LCD display does not match the readings The Area or K factor of the transmitter does not match transmitter with that of the host control system and
indicated by the host control system. that of the host controls. make adjustments to ensure a match.
The returned value for airflow is zero when airflow is The Low Limit airflow cutoff value is above the actual Decrease the Low Limit airflow cutoff value in the
indicated on the LCD display of the transmitter. airflow reading. Setup menu until it is below the actual airflow reading.
The sensor detection system has detected one or probe connections look OK and match the number of
The status point from the transmitter has a Trouble more malfunctioning or missing sensors. sensor probes indicated on each probe's hang tag.
value.
Differential pressure is only available from transmitters If a differential pressure measurement is required,
There is no value for the differential pressure point that have a Bi-directional Bleed Airflow Sensors contact your local Daikin Representative about a Bi-
connected. directional Bleed Airflow Sensor.

ECM Motor
Addressing Return Or Exhaust ECM

ECM Motor
Rebel (size 003–015) SAFs and all EAFs utilize ECM

[electronically commutated external rotor] motors. ECM motor 1. Close the MMP or shut the circuit breakers to the
speed is controlled by unit mounted, MicroTech III, static supply and energy recovery drives to keep modbus
pressure and temperature controls to reliably maintain comfort communication enabled only at the return/exhaust ECM.
conditions.
2. Verify the RS485 output on the Microtech III controller is
These ECM motors include locked rotor, phase failure, low connected at terminals A and B to TB1 terminals 39 and
voltage, high temperature and short circuit protection as well 40 respectively.
as built in soft start logic. Details are provided in the vendor’s
IOM manual. 3. Make sure the shield for the twisted pair cable is
terminated at TB terminal 41 only.
Customer design speed is programmed into the ECM motor
based on desired CFM and ESP. Design speed can be 4. At the drive, verify wires from the controller side
changed as follows as long as the fan’s maximum RPM is not terminals 39 and 40 are terminated at the ECM terminals
exceeded per Table 32. RSA and RSB. See Detail B on page 84.
• Go into the MicroTech III keypad / display [see OM 1141 5. At the Microtech III controller enter a level 2 password of
for detailed instructions] 6363 and click on “About This AHU” to verify if code 101
is being used (310 for
• On the main menu, go to commission unit
Maverick). If any other
• Go to SF [or RF/EF] set up menu codes are being used,
• find Max SAF [or EAF] RPM please consult with
• Enter the desired maximum RPM McQuay Warranty Service
group for technical
Table 32: ECM Motor Fan Size Maximum RPM support.
Wheel Diameter (mm) SAF Max RPM EAF Max RPM

6. Press the middle
rectangular button to go
12" (310) 2580 2580
back to the main menu.
14" (355) 2600 2600
16" (400) 2040 2550
22" (560) 1750 NA
NOTE: 2-16" (400 mm) EAFs are available on sizes 016–028. Each uses the 7. Scroll down and click on the “Unit Configuration Menu”
same valves.
8. Scroll to the “SAF type” and set it to EBM VAV
9. Scroll to the “RAF type” and set it to EBM VAV
ECM Motor Setup
10. Scroll up to “Apply
(Required when replacing exhaust fans) Changes” and set it to
ECM - Electronically Commutated Motor communicates Yes. Wait for the controller
via modbus RS485 twisted pair cables to the Microtech III to restart.
controller. Microtech III can address the ECM for a supply,
return, or exhaust fan operation based on a unique modbus
address. A replacement ECM is shipped out from the 11. Enter the level 2 password
warehouse with an address of “1” which is a direct replacement again and go into “Service
for a supply fan and does not require additional setup. If the Menus”
ECM is being used as a return or exhaust fan, it needs to be
setup with an address of “2”

ECM Motor
12. Click on the “Modbus ECM Smoke Purge or Ventilation Override

Status” menu
Microtech III has been configured via modbus to perform a
ventilation override if terminals Din2 and GND at Terminal strip
3 on the ECM are made. Install an isolation relay that would
make a dry NO contact across the return/exhaust fan Din2 and
GND per Detail A on page 83.
13. If the drive return drive is
wired correctly and is Figure 69: Smoke Purge Wiring
communicating then the
SF MB status will show
“OK” while the RF MB
status will show “Fault”. SF MB Status = Supply Fan Modbus
RF MB Status = Return Fan Modbus
Verify wiring connections
ER MB Status = Energy Recovery
and 3-phase power to the Modbus
ECM if both SAF and RF
status show “Fault.”
14. Click on the “ECM Config” menu

15. Set “ECM config” to
“SetAdd2”
16. The controller will revert back to the “ECM Config” menu
but now the SF MB Status will show fault while the RF
MB Status will show ok. In a smoke situation, the field wired smoke detector would
eliminate 24VAC to the DI4 terminal at the Microtech controller
17. Hit the middle rectangular button to go back to the main
issuing an emergency fault at the Microtech keypad. The entire
menu.
unit would shut down in which case the field would need to
18. Click on the “Unit configure the NO to close upon a smoke shutdown and allow
Configuration” menu and the return/exhaust fan to run. Setting the speed of the drive
set the SAF type back to during ventilation override is described below.
the original setting.
Setting the RF/EF max vent speed:
1. After entering the
19. Scroll up and set “Apply controller password 6363,
changes” to yes. click on “Commission Unit”
20. Reset MMPs for the supply and energy recovery drive to
observe ER MB Status and SF MB Status show “OK” 2. Scroll down and click on
“RF/EF Set-Up”
3. Scroll down to
“MaxVentSpd” and select
the desired speed for the
ECM during a smoke
shutdown.

Unit Options
Unit Options
Economizer Enthalpy Control Figure 70: Pressure Tubing Diagram

TO ENTERING
The economizer can be ordered with the optional differential
AIR SIDE OF
enthalpy control. With this option a solid-state humidity and
THE FILTERS PC5
temperature sensing device is located in the return and
outdoor airstreams. These devices are labeled RAE and OAE
respectively. When the outdoor enthalpy is lower than the HI LO
return air enthalpy, the economizer operation will be initiated.
If the outdoor air enthalpy is higher than the return air, the
TO LEAVING
outdoor air damper position will be at the minimum setpoint. HI
AIR SIDE OF
See OM 1141 for further information on the economizer LO
THE FILTERS
operation.
HI DHL
External Time Clock LO
You can use an external time clock as an alternative to (or in PC7
addition to) the MicroTech III controller’s internal scheduling
TO SUPPLY
function. The external timing mechanism is set up to open and
close the circuit between field terminals 101 and 102. When
FAN PLENUM
the circuit is open, power is not supplied to binary input ID1.
This is the normal condition where the controller follows the
programmable internal schedule. When the circuit is closed, All VAV units also have the PC7 and PC5 switches as standard
power is fed to ID1. The MicroTech III controller responds (see Figure 70). These switches are tied into the Duct High
by placing the unit in the occupied mode, overriding any set Limit switch (DHL) as shown in Figure 70.
internal schedule. The DHL is factory set at 4.0". When this differential pressure
is sensed the normally closed contacts will open on the switch
Exhaust Fan Option giving the DHL alarm at the unit controller.
Economizer units may include exhaust fan options. For units

with CAV applications, the exhaust fans can be ordered as Duct High Pressure Limit
staged control or they may be ordered with building pressure The duct high pressure limit control (DHL) is provided on all
control. The building pressure control option has an inverter VAV units. The DHL protects the duct work, terminal boxes,
that runs the exhaust fan motors and is controlled by the static and the unit from over pressurization, which could be caused
pressure sensor number 2 (SPS2). The units are only available by, for example, tripped fire dampers or control failure.
with building pressure control on VAV units.
The DHL control opens when the discharge plenum pressure
The exhaust fan motors are permanently lubricated and do not rises to 3.5" wc (872 Pa). This setting should be correct for
require any additional periodic lubrication. most applications and should not be adjusted.
If the DHL switch opens, digital input ID9 on the Unit Control
Proof-of-Airflow and Dirty Filter Switch Board will be de-energized. The MicroTech III controller then
The proof-of-airflow switch (PC7) and the dirty filter switch shuts down the unit and enters the Off-Alarm state. The alarm
(PC5) are supplied on all CAV units. The tubing is installed must be manually cleared before the unit can start again.
to the switches per Figure 70. The proof of airflow switches Refer to the operation manual supplied with your unit for more
senses the pressure difference between the positive pressure information on clearing alarms (refer to OM 1141).
in the supply air fan compartment and the suction pressure
on the leaving air side of the filters. The differential pressure
is factory set for this switch. The dirty filter switch senses the
pressure difference across the filter; from the entering air side
of the filter to the leaving air side of the filters. The switch is
factory set at 1.0". When the pressure difference across the
filters is sensed at this value, the dirty filter alarm will appear
on the DDC controller.

Unit Options
Convenience Receptacle (Field Powered) Convenience Receptacle (Unit Powered)

A Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) convenience A Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) convenience
receptacle is provided in the main control box on all units. To receptacle is provided in the main control box on all units. The
use this receptacle, connect a separate field-supplied 115 V receptacle shall be powered by a factory installed and wired
power wiring circuit to the outlet. 120V, 20 amp power supply. The power supply shall be wired
to the line side of the unit’s main disconnect, so the receptacle
is powered when the main unit disconnect is off. This option
shall include a GFI receptacle, transformer, and a branch
circuit disconnect. The electrical circuit shall be complete with
primary and secondary overload protection. See Figure 71 for
a branch circuit diagram.
Figure 71: Unit Powered GFCI Receptacle Schematic
VOLTAGE PRI.
460V LINE

Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 72: Typical CAV_VAV 208-230 VAC Wiring (1 of 4) — DPS 003–006 shown
101
DS1
PB1
102 208V, 3 Phase, 60Hz
L1 T1 103B
L1
103 CUSTOMER L2 T2 104B
SUPPLIED L2
104 POWER
L3 T3 105A
L3
105 Wire for CW
phase monitor
MMP1
106 DS6 PB1 PB1
GLG1 103A L1 T1 110A
107A L1 T1
107 T1 T1 EVB208-I EVB
104A L2 T2 110B
108A L2 T2 108B (350)
108 T2 T2 1
FILTER
T6 X77A
208V 109A L3 T3 109B
109 2kVA T3 T3 3
H1 H2 EVBF
GND2
110
112D
112A
112C
112B
111
120V
X1 X3 A4PPWR-E
114A 114B M1F CMP1
112
CMP1-PE U U
113A NB
114B U
113 REC1 L1A L2A L3A E1
FILTER
1
F6C
2 114D LN-H LN-N A4P V
114C V V M
114 3
G (350) W W GND
115A
LD-H LD-N 114B W
115
TB2 G
OF1F
U OFN1
116 BLK U
1 NB
PC0615-2(A)
V V M
X501A
117 WHT
2
3
FILTER
MMP10 INDOOR_FAN W W CTRL
118 PB1 RED
IFN-PI NB 3
119A L1 T1 119B 1 L1
119 T1 1 YEL
P1 1
2 BLU
120A L2 T2 120B 2 L2 M 2
X502A
120 T2 3 ORG
3 LR1 3
L3 T3 3 L3 4 PNK
121A 121B 4
121 T3 P2 5 GRY
5
GND10 4
122A GND X504A X5A
122 1 2 1 2 N3 P3
123
124 MMP51 EXH_FAN1

PB1 EXH-PI NB
125 125A L1 T1 125B 1 L1
T1
126
T2
126A L2 T2 126B 2 L2 M
3
127 127A L3 T3 127B 3 L3
T3 A5PF
FILTER
GND51 4
128 128A GND
131A
131B
131E
131F
WHT
A4/41-I
129
A4/5-I
BLK
A4/7-I
130
MMP3 CMP3 OF2F OFN2
PB1 CMP3-PE U U
131 M3 NB BLK NB
1 2 1 2 N1 P1 1
132A L1 T1 132B L1 T1 132C U
T1
FILTER
V
132 X3A X5A WHT V M
X1A
2
FILTER
T2
133A L2 T2 133B L2 T2 133C V M 3
133 RED W W CTRL
3 3
134A L3 T3 134B L3 T3 134C W GND A5P
T3 PC0715-2(A)
134 1 YEL
1
M3F 2 BLU
2
135 3 ORG
X2A
3
4 PNK
X4A 4
136 5 GRY
1 2 5
137
BLK
138 A5PJMP-I
137A
139
140
141
142
PB1
143
T1
144
R-CCH1 PL10 CCH1 PL10
1 9 CCH1-I 2 x1 x2 1 CCH1-I
145B 145C 145A
145 T3
NB
(305)
146
PL11 CCH3 PL11
M3 CCH3-I 2 1 CCH3-I
145B 22 21 147A x1 x2 145A
147
NB
(307)
148
149
PB1 F1A
150A 1 2 153A
150 T1
6A
151
F1B
T1
152A 1 2 153B 208V PRI.
152 T3 500VA
6A H1 H2
153
154
TB1 F1C X1 X3 TB1
155 1 159A 2 1 155A 155B 3
120V SEC.
1 7A 3
156
1 3
157 3G
155B
158
159A 155B
159 1 2 T2B
120V
CLASS 2
160
120V_H 75VA 120V_N
161 (202) (202)
24V
(302) TB1 3 4 TB1 (302)
(333) 4 162A 162B 5 (333)
162
5
163 5G 162B
T2B_24V T2B_N
164
(248) (248)
(354) (355)

Wiring Diagrams
Figure 72 continued: Typical CAV_VAV 208-230 VAC Wiring (2 of 4) — DPS 003–006 shown
(160) (160)
201
120V_H 120V_N
202
203
159A 155B
204 1 2 T2A
120V
CLASS 2
205 75VA
TB1 24V TB1
206 6 3 4 7
207A 207B
207 6 7
6 7G 207B
208
MCB
207A
209 G-24V 207B
GO-24C
TIME CLOCK OR
210 TENNANT OVERIDE
TB2 TB2 207B
T_CLOCK R3-4
207A 101 102 211A
211 NB DI3
212 (345)
RA Smoke SA Smoke Emergency A+ A1+ /
Mod Bus (358)
Detector Detector Off
213 TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 Connection (346)
SD2-E SD2 SD2-E 104 R63 B- B1- /
103 105 106 (359)
207A 207A 214A MJ MJ 214A 214B 301G Mount Sensor
214 DI4 RS485 (347)
9 10 9 (244) 5 GND1 / In Supply Air Duct
(359)
PC7 R63 DAT-I DAT
215
1 2 216A 216B WHT
DI1 AI1
216 PC5 12 (244) 8
BLK NB
217A 1 3 217B M
DI2
217 DRN 301G
217A PL1 RAT-E RAT
218 M RAT-I
WHT 1 RED
CBL217-I TB8 AI2
219 BLK 311 219C
SPS1 TB1 + 24VDC 219B BLK 2 BLK NB
M
MB TB1 - WHT TB8 301G
220 X6-AI DRN 3 DRN
301G 302
DRN
OAT
221 OAT-I
BLK
CBL221-I
222 BLK NB
SPS2 TB1 + AI3
BLK
MB TB1 - WHT
223 X8-AI
301G
DRN
224
CBL225-I
TB2 WHT TB2 S ZNT1
225 HUM1 219C X3-AI NB
24VDC OVERRIDE
NB 131 120
226A 226B BLK
226 OUT X5-AI M
126 TB8 303 C
Humidity 227A 121
Sensor COM M DRN
227 127
}
121G
228 CBL229-I
WHT TB2
LCT LCT-E PL2 LCT-I X4-AI DISCHARGE AIR
229 Leaving Coil RED 1 WHT 132 TEMPERATURE
X2-AI BLK
Temperature EXTERNAL RESET
230 NB BLK 2 BLK 133
M DRN
DRN 3 DRN 301G
}
231 CBL232-I 121G
WHT TB2
X1-AI
232 CO2/MIN OA
124
BLK /OA FLOW
233
125
DRN
234
121G
235 ALARM OUTPUT

DO9 DO9 TB2 TB2
C9-10
207A 236A 207B
236 117
DO10 115
DO10
ACT3-I 237A
237 PL7
RED 1 RED TB8 207A 116
1
238 ACT3
GRY 3 WHT 310
NB 3 X7-AO
239 BLK 2 BLK
2
301G
PL9 DRN
240
OAE-I OAE-E
207A 1 207A OAER
24V OAE 3 PL9
NO NC
241 OAE-E OAE-I
242A 242B 2 242B 13 14
RAE + + 1
(311)
242 242C 207B 3 207B 207B
S SR COM
RAE-E
243 R63
DHL
NO NC
207A 1 3 244A 13 14 207B

(214)
(216)
244
TB2 SD1 TB2
207A 207B
245
122 SD2-E SD2 NB SD2-E 123
246 207A 4 5 207B
(163) (163)
EXPD
247 T2B_24V T2B_N
PL6 SVR PL6
C2 DO2 DO2 SVR-I 1 2 SVR-I
248 162A 248A 1 2 162B
249 NB
PL5 4WV-E 4WV 4WV-E PL5 4WV-I
DO4 DO4 4WV-I 1 2
250 250A 250A 1 2 162B 162B
251 NB
SVB-I PL8 SVB PL8
C3-4 DO3 DO3 SVB-I
252 162A 252A 1 1 2 2 162B
PTS-I NB
253 WHT
PTS S X1
NB BLK 254A
254 - M
TB8 304 R-HP1
RED DO1
+ +5V / (259) DO1
255 255C 12 8 RED
DRN 301G 255 / (354)
PTD-I (303)
256 PTD BLK C1
- WHT
NB 256 / (354)
WHT
257 S X2 SRT
SRT-I
RED BLK
+ +5V / (259) X6
258 301G TB8 TB8
DRN
(255) 305 255A 258B 307 BLK NB
/ +5V +5VDC M
259 DRT1 (258)
DRT1-I
BLK DIP SWITCH
X3
260 ON
NB TB8 DFT
BLK 260A OFF
M DFT-I
261 306 1 2 3 4 5 6 BLK
SW6 MUST
DRT3 NB
262 DRT3-I BE ON BLK
BLK X7
WHEN LAST
263 NB BLK
X4
264

Wiring Diagrams
(160) (160)
301
120V_H HP1 120V_N
PL4 NB PL4 R-HP1
NO NC
302 HP1-I 1 2 HP1-I
159A H C 303A 13 14 155B
(307)
(255)
303
MCB
(145)
304 R-CCH1
NO NC
C1 DO1 DO1B
159A 305A 13 14 155B
305
HP3
(132) (147)
306 PL3 NB PL3 R-HP1 M3
HP3-I 2 HP3-I 307A DO2
NO NC
1 H C 9 5 C2 DO2B A1 A2
159A 307B 307C 155B
(133)
(134)
307
(303)
308
309 DI5 R5-6

307B 155B
310
OAER
159A 311A
311 DI6
9 (242) 5
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
HEAT1 HEAT-E HEAT-I
321 PL19 PL15
GRN GRN
HEAT-E G
3 6
322 HEAT-I PL19
RED 4 RED WHT WHT
L1 L2
323 PL15 1 2 5
EXPD
HEAT-E
324 HEAT-I 1 PL18
WHT WHT
X5-AO +
325 PL15 3
326 RHB1 BLK 2 BLK

4
RHV-I M -
MOD GAS
327
BLK 327A
B + 327B
X8-AO DRN 3 DRN HEATER
RHV1
WHT 328A
W - 328B
M 301G NB
328 GRN 328C 330A
G -24V
RED 329A 330B
329 R CN2 +24V
3 4
CHV-I 24V
330
BLK 328A T7
CLASS 2
331 WHT 327A
120V
CHV1 1 2
GRN 328C
332
159A
155B
RED 329A
333
120V_H 120V_N
334 (160) (160)
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342 Note: Connect External Field Shield Wires

Together, But Do Not Terminate To
343 Ground At The Rooftop Unit
BNMS
CBL340-I
{
344 TB2 WHT
+
128 CBL345-I
345 Bacnet MSTP BLK WHT
- A1+ /(212)
Building COM BLK
129 B1- / (213)
346 RED
REF
DRN
130 DRN GND1 / (214)
347
130G A2+ /(361)
348 EVBJMP-I
WHT
B2- / (361)
349
GND2 / (362)
EVI EVI-E
350 ORG 1 5 WHT A4P
1 + - GND
RED 2 4 BLK 1 3 EVB/88-I (112)
2 A4/4-I
351 YEL 3 BRN WHT MODBUS 351E
X86A
3 3 X89A 1 1 1 1
EVI BLK 2 RED
ACS3
ACS1
X88A
4
X4A
NB 4
352 GRY 5 1 GRN EVB BLK 352B
5 2 2 2 2
EVO EVO-E (107) A4P-X6A-I
353 ORG IFB 255 A4P-X6A-E
1 5 WHT 256 PL17
1 / T2B_24V IFB-I
RED 2 4 BLK (163) 162A 354A (255) (257) WHT 1 WHT
2 3 3
X87A
24VAC
16V
354 YEL BRN
TN2
3 3 DIP SWITCH
FILTER
EVO 3 / T2B_N 162B BLK 2 BLK

X6A
ON K SD 24
BLK 4 2 RED (163) 1 GND 2
NB 4 X79A X80A
355 GRY 5 1 GRN 1234 DIP SWITCH
5 1 1 2 RED 3 RED
2 2
1
356 1234 IFBF
357 IFN_MOTOR
IFN-CI NB
WHT 1
358 (212) / A1+
BLK 2
(213) / B1-
359 DRN
(214) / GND1
360 EXH_MOTOR
EXH-CI
WHT 1 NB
BLK
BLK
BLK
(348) / A2+
BLK
361 BLK 2
IRT-E ORT-E (349) / B2-
DRN
362 (349) / GND2
363 IRT ORT
364

MMP51 MMP10 MMP3
RHB1
BNMS MCB EXPD
T7
GND2
PB1 A5P
GND51 GND10
OAT-I - 62" EVB
A4/4-I - 59"
PL17 (A4P-X6A) - 0"
F6C EVB/88-I - 59"
R-CCH1 OAER A4P-PI - 59"
M3 EVB-230-I - 59"
IFN-PI - 3"
IFN-CI - 3" T2B EVB-208-I - 59"
Short Red - Air IFB
DS1
Pressure Tube - 10" F1A F1B F1C
H X
www.DaikinApplied.com
R63 R-HP1
208/230V INVERTER PANEL
T2A T1
A4P
Dwyer Dwyer LR1
SPS2 SPS1
DS6
Magnesense Magnesense
F1A F1B F1C
DHL REC1 H T6 X

PC5 PC7
EVI-I - 74"
SD2 (Return Air Smoke Detector) - NA
PL7 (ACT3) - 107" FOR HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING PATCH PLATE:
ACT12-I - 128"
DO NOT RUN HIGH VOLTAGE WIRES INSIDE WIRE TRACK RAT (PL1)
LCT (PL2) DRT1-I - 24"
ACT-3-I - 111"
HP3 (PL3) DRT3-I - 30"
Red - Air Pressure Tube - 105"
HP1 (PL4) SRT-I - 21"
Blue - Air Pressure Tube - 100"
SVR (PL6) ORT-I - 39"
EXH-PI - 155"
SVB (PL8) DFT-I - 47" ID: Description: ID: Description:
EXH-CI - 155"
OAE (PL9) PTS-I - 30" 4WV Four Way Valve OAE Enthalpy Sensor, Outside Air
CCH1 (PL10) PTD-I - 10" A4P Compressor 1 Inverter OAER Relay, Outside Air Enthalpy
CCH3 (PL11) EVO-I - 36" A4PF Compressor 1 Inverter Electrical Noise Filter OAT Temperature Sensor, Outside Air
HEAT1-I (PL15) 4WV-I - 3" A5P Outdoor Fan 1 Inverter OF1F Outdoor Fan Electrical Noise Filter 1
RHV1-I - 3" A5P+ Outdoor Fan 2 Inverter OF2F Outdoor Fan Electrical Noise Filter 2
CHV1-I - 6"
A5PF Outdoor Fan Electrical Noise Filter ORT Outdoor Refrigerant Temperature Sensor
DAT-I - 45"
ACT12 PB1 Power Block, Power Distribution
ACT3 Actuator Motor, Economizer PB1F Power Block Electrical Noise Filter
AHL Auxiliary High Limit PC5 Pressure Control, Dirty Filter Switch
CCH Crankcase Heater PC7 Pressure Control, Proof Airflow Switch
81
CHV1 Valve, Condenser Coil PTD Discharge Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
Comm Mod. Communication Module (BACnet, Lonworks, ...) PTS Suction Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
D3 DIII-NET Communication Gateway PVM1 Phase Voltage Monitor
DAT Temperature Sensor, Discharge Air R60 Energy Recovery Face and Bypass Damper Relay
DFT Defrost Temperature Sensor R63 Relay, Duct High Limit Switch
DHL Duct Hi-limit, Switch RAE Enthalpy Sensor, Return Air
DRT1,3 Discharge Refrigerant Temperature Sensor RAT Temperature Sensor, Return Air
DS1 Disconnect Switch, Unit Power R-CCH1 Crankcase Heater Relay
DS6 Disconnect Switch, Powered GFCI Receptacle REC1 Receptacle, GFCI
EVB Expansion Valve Board RES3,4 Resistor
EVBF Expansion Valve Board Electrical Noise Filter RHB1 Reheat Board, Hot Gas
EVI Indoor Expansion Valve R-HP1 High Pressure Compressor 1 Relay
EVO Outdoor Expansion Valve RHV1 Valve, Reheat Coil
EXPB,D Expansion Control Board SD1/SD2 Smoke Detector, Supply Air/Return Air
F1A,B Fuse, Control Circuit Transformer (T1), Primary SHS1 Space Humidity Sensor
F1C,D Fuse, Control Circuit Transformer (T1), Secondary SPS1 Static Pressure Sensor, Duct
F4A,B,C Fuse, 460V 3-Phase Transformer (T4), Primary SPS2 Static Pressure Sensor, Building
F6C Fuse, Powered GFCI Transformer (T6), Secondary SRT Suction Refrigerant Temperature Sensor
HEAT1 Heater Module SVB Refrigerant Bypass Solenoid Valve
HL Hi-Limit Switch, Gas Heat SVR Refrigerant Receiver Solenoid Valve
HP1,3 Hi-Pressure Switch, Refrigeration Circuits 1, 3 T1 Transformer, Main Control
IFB Interface Board T12 575/460V Primary Power Transformer
IFBF Interface Board Electrical Noise Filter T1F Main Transformer Electrical Noise Filter
IRT Indoor Refrigerant Temperature Sensor T2A,B Transformer, Control Input (115/24VAC)
LCT Temperature Sensor, Leaving Coil T4 Transformer, 230V Single Phase (460/397VAC)
LR1 Compressor Line Reactor T6 Transformer, Powered GFCI Receptacle (Line/115VAC)
Field Wiring
M1F Compressor 1 Electrical Noise Filter T7 Transformer, Reheat Control Board (115/24VAC)
M3 Contactor, Compressor 3 TB1 Terminal Block, Internal Power Distribution
Factory Wiring MCB Main Control Board TB2 Terminal Block, Field -24V
MJ Mechanical Jumper TB8 Terminal Block, Internal Signal Distribution
Factory Terminal MMP1 Manual Motor Protector, A4P Board VFD60 Variable Frequency Drive, Energy Recovery Wheel
MMP10 Manual Motor Protector, Supply Fan
Field Terminal MMP3 Manual Motor Protector, Compressor 3
MMP51 Manual Motor Protector, Exhaust Fan
MMP60 Manual Motor Protector, Energy Recovery Wheel
Plug Connection
IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS

Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 73: Typical CAV_VAV 460 VAC Wiring (1 of 4) — DPS 003–006 shown
101
DS1
PB1
102 460V, 3 Phase, 60Hz
L1 T1 103B
L1
103 CUSTOMER L2 T2 104B
SUPPLIED L2
104 POWER
L3 T3 105A
L3
105 Wire for CW
phase monitor
MMP1
106 DS6 PB1 PB1
GLG1 T4-I
103A L1 T1 110A F4A 2
107A L1 T1 107B 1 110B
107 T1 T1
104A L2 T2 110C
FILTER
108A L2 T2 F4B 2
108B 1 110D
108 T2 T2
460V T6 F4C 1
109A L3 T3 109B 2 110E
109 2kVA T3 T3
H4 H2 H3 H1 T4F 0.5A L1 L2 L3 T4
110 1290VA
111
120V
114A X1 X2 114B TB1 T1 T2 T3 N TB1
112 8 11
113B 113A
114B 11
113 REC1
F6C
116B
1 2 114C LN-H LN-N
114
G CCH_230V / (144) (145) / CCH_N
LD-H LD-N 114B
115
TB2 G
TB1 TB1 113A EVB
9 10 3
116 116A 116B (350)
1 X77A
117 EVB230-I
MMP10 INDOOR_FAN PB1F FILTER

118 PB1 IFN-PI NB
L1 T1 1 L1 FILTER A4PF
119A 119B
119 T1
120C
120A
116A
113A
120B
120 T2
120D L2 T2 120E 2 L2 M A4P-PI
3
121A L3 T3 121B 3 L3
121 T3 3 2 1 1 3
GND10 4 X10A X1A
122A GND
122
A4P
LR1-I PC0702-1(A) M1F CMP1
123 CMP1-PE U
124A 124B U NB
1
P1
124 MMP51 EXH_FAN1
FILTER
125A V V M
X11A
PB1 EXH-PI LR1 2
NB
125 L1 T1 1 L1 3
125C 125D P2 W W GND
T1 125B X41A X5A 126A
1 2 1 2 N3 P3 3
126
T2
126B L2 T2 126C 2 L2 M
3
127 127A L3 T3 127B 3 L3
T3 A5PF
FILTER
GND51 4
128 128A GND
131A
131B
131E
131F
WHT
A4/41-I
129
A4/5-I
BLK
A4/7-I
130
MMP3 CMP3 OF1F OFN1
PB1 CMP3-PE U U
131 M3 NB BLK NB
1 2 1 2 N1 P1 1
132A L1 T1 132B L1 T1 132C U
T1
132 X3A X5A FILTER WHT
V V M
X1A
2
FILTER
T2
133A L2 T2 133B L2 T2 133C V M 3
133 RED W W CTRL
3 3
134A L3 T3 134B L3 T3 134C W GND A5P
T3 PC0511-1(A)
134 1 YEL
1
M3F 2 BLU
2
135 3 ORG
X2A
3
4 PNK
X4A X51A 4
136 N2 P2 5 GRY
1 2 1 2 5
137
138
142E
142F
WHT
139
BLK
A5/51-I
142D
142C
A5/4-I
140
141 OFN2
OF2F NB
142 U U
BLK
1 2 1 2 N1 P1 1
FILTER
V
143 X3A X5A
WHT V M
X1A
2
(114) / CCH_230V 3
144 W W CTRL
PL10 PL10 RED
R-CCH1 CCH1 3
1 9 CCH1-I 2 x1 x2 1 CCH1-I A5P+
113A 145A 113B PC0511-2(A)
145 (114) / CCH_N
NB 1 YEL
(305) 1
146 2 BLU
PL11 CCH3 PL11 2
M3 CCH3-I 2 1 CCH3-I 3 ORG
X2A
113A 22 21 147A x1 x2 113B 3

147 4 PNK
X4A 4
NB 5 GRY
(307) 1 2 5
148
149 BLK
PB1 F1A A5PJMP-I
1 2 149A
150A 153A
150 T1
4A
151
F1B
460V PRI. T1
152A 1 2 153B
152 T3 500VA
4A H1 H3 H2 H4
153
154
TB1 F1C X1 X4 TB1
155 1 159A 2 1 155A 155B 3
1 120V SEC. 3
3A
156
1 3
157 3G
155B
158
159A 155B
159 1 2 T2B
120V
CLASS 2
160
120V_H 75VA 120V_N
161 (202) (202)
24V
(302) TB1 3 4 TB1 (302)
(333) 4 162A 162B 5 (333)
162
5
163 5G 162B
T2B_24V T2B_N
164
(248) (248)
(354) (355)

Wiring Diagrams
Figure 73 continued: Typical CAV_VAV 460 VAC Wiring (2 of 4) — DPS 003–006 shown
(160) (160)
201
120V_H 120V_N
202
203
159A 155B
204 1 2 T2A
120V
CLASS 2
205 75VA
TB1 24V TB1
206 6 3 4 7
207A 207B
207 6 7
6 7G 207B
208
MCB
207A
209 G-24V 207B
GO-24C
TIME CLOCK OR
210 TENNANT OVERIDE
TB2 TB2 207B
T_CLOCK R3-4
207A 101 102 211A
211 NB DI3
212 (345)
RA Smoke
Detector
SA Smoke Emergency
Detector Off Detail A Mod Bus
Connection
A+ A1+ /
(358)
213 TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 (346)
SD2-E SD2 SD2-E 104 R63 B- B1- /
103 105 106 (359)
207A 207A 214A MJ MJ 214A 214B 301G Mount Sensor
214 DI4 RS485 (347)
9 10 9 (244) 5 GND1 / In Supply Air Duct
(359)
PC7 R63 DAT-I DAT
215
1 2 216A 216B WHT
DI1 AI1
216 PC5 12 (244) 8
BLK NB
217A 1 3 217B M
DI2
217 DRN 301G
217A PL1 RAT-E RAT
218 M RAT-I
WHT 1 RED
CBL217-I TB8 AI2
219 BLK 311 219C
SPS1 TB1 + 24VDC 219B BLK 2 BLK NB
M
MB TB1 - WHT TB8 301G
220 X6-AI DRN 3 DRN
301G 302
DRN
OAT
221 OAT-I
BLK
CBL221-I
222 BLK NB
SPS2 TB1 + AI3
BLK
MB TB1 - WHT
223 X8-AI
301G
DRN
224
CBL225-I
TB2 WHT TB2 S ZNT1
225 HUM1 219C X3-AI NB
24VDC OVERRIDE
NB 131 120
226A 226B BLK
226 OUT X5-AI M
126 TB8 303 C
Humidity 227A 121
Sensor COM M DRN
227 127
}
121G
228 CBL229-I
WHT TB2
LCT LCT-E PL2 LCT-I X4-AI DISCHARGE AIR
229 Leaving Coil RED 1 WHT 132 TEMPERATURE
X2-AI BLK
Temperature EXTERNAL RESET
230 NB BLK 2 BLK 133
M DRN
DRN 3 DRN 301G
}
231 CBL232-I 121G
WHT TB2
X1-AI
232 CO2/MIN OA
124
BLK /OA FLOW
233
125
DRN
234
121G
235 ALARM OUTPUT

DO9 DO9 TB2 TB2
C9-10
207A 236A 207B
236 117
DO10 115
DO10
ACT3-I 237A
237 PL7
1
238 ACT3
GRY 3 WHT 310
NB 3 X7-AO
239 BLK 2 BLK
2
301G
PL9 DRN
240
OAE-I OAE-E
207A 1 207A OAER
24V OAE 3 PL9
NO NC
241 OAE-E OAE-I
242A 242B 2 242B 13 14
RAE + + 1
(311)
242 242C 207B 3 207B 207B
S SR COM
RAE-E
243 R63
DHL
NO NC
207A 1 3 244A 13 14 207B

(214)
(216)
244
TB2 SD1 TB2
207A 207B
245
122 SD2-E SD2 NB SD2-E 123
246 207A 4 5 207B
(163) (163)
EXPD
247 T2B_24V T2B_N
PL6 SVR PL6
C2 DO2 DO2 SVR-I 1 2 SVR-I
248 162A 248A 1 2 162B
249 NB
PL5 4WV-E 4WV 4WV-E PL5 4WV-I
DO4 DO4 4WV-I 1 2
250 250A 250A 1 2 162B 162B
251 NB
SVB-I PL8 SVB PL8
C3-4 DO3 DO3 SVB-I
252 162A 252A 1 1 2 2 162B
PTS-I NB
253 WHT
PTS S X1
NB BLK 254A
254 - M
TB8 304 R-HP1
RED DO1
+ +5V / (259) DO1
255 255C 12 8 RED
DRN 301G 255 / (354)
PTD-I (303)
256 PTD BLK C1
- WHT
NB 256 / (354)
WHT
257 S X2 SRT
SRT-I
RED BLK
+ +5V / (259) X6
258 301G TB8 TB8
DRN
(255) 305 255A 258B 307 BLK NB
/ +5V +5VDC M
259 DRT1 (258)
DRT1-I
BLK DIP SWITCH
X3
260 ON
NB TB8 DFT
BLK 260A OFF
M DFT-I
261 306 1 2 3 4 5 6 BLK
SW6 MUST
DRT3 NB
262 DRT3-I BE ON BLK
BLK X7
WHEN LAST
263 NB BLK
X4
264

Wiring Diagrams
(160) (160)
301
120V_H HP1 120V_N
PL4 NB PL4 R-HP1
NO NC
302 HP1-I 1 2 HP1-I
159A H C 303A 13 14 155B
(307)
(255)
303
MCB
(145)
304 R-CCH1
NO NC
C1 DO1 DO1B
159A 305A 13 14 155B
305
HP3
(132) (147)
NO NC
1 H C 9 5 C2 DO2B A1 A2
159A 307B 307C 155B
(133)
(134)
307
(303)
308
309 DI5 R5-6

307B 155B
310
OAER
159A 311A
311 DI6
9 (242) 5
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
HEAT1 HEAT-E HEAT-I
321 PL19 PL15
GRN GRN
HEAT-E G
3 6
322 HEAT-I PL19
RED 4 RED WHT WHT
L1 L2
323 PL15 1 2 5
EXPD
HEAT-E
324 HEAT-I 1 PL18
WHT WHT
X5-AO +
325 PL15 3
326 RHB1 BLK 2 BLK

4
RHV-I M -
MOD GAS
327
BLK 327A
B + 327B
X8-AO DRN 3 DRN HEATER
RHV1
WHT 328A
W - 328B
M 301G NB
328 GRN 328C 330A
G -24V
RED 329A 330B
329 R CN2 +24V
3 4
CHV-I 24V
330
BLK 328A T7
CLASS 2
331 WHT 327A
120V
CHV1 1 2
GRN 328C
332
159A
155B
RED 329A
333
120V_H 120V_N
334 (160) (160)
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342 Note: Connect External Field Shield Wires

Together, But Do Not Terminate To
343 Ground At The Rooftop Unit
BNMS
CBL340-I
Detail B
{
344 TB2 WHT
+
128 CBL345-I
345 Bacnet MSTP BLK WHT
- A1+ /(212)
Building COM BLK
129 B1- / (213)
346 RED
REF
DRN
130 DRN GND1 / (214)
347
130G A2+ /(361)
348 EVBJMP-I
WHT
B2- / (361)
349
GND2 / (362)
EVI EVI-E
350 ORG 1 5 WHT A4P
1 + - GND
RED 2 4 BLK 1 3 EVB/88-I (120)
2 A4/4-I
351 YEL 3 BRN WHT MODBUS 351E
X86A
3 3 X89A 1 1 1 1
EVI BLK 2 RED
ACS3
ACS1
X88A
4
X4A
NB 4
352 GRY 5 1 GRN EVB BLK 352B
5 2 2 2 2
EVO EVO-E (115) A4P-X6A-I
353 ORG IFB 255 A4P-X6A-E
1 5 WHT 256 PL17
1 / T2B_24V IFB-I
RED 2 4 BLK (163) 162A 354A (255) (257) WHT 1 WHT
2 3 3
X87A
24VAC
16V
354 YEL BRN
TN2
3 3 DIP SWITCH
FILTER
EVO 3 / T2B_N 162B BLK 2 BLK

X6A
ON K SD 24
BLK 4 2 RED (163) 1 GND 2
NB 4 X79A X80A
355 GRY 5 1 GRN 1234 DIP SWITCH
5 1 1 2 RED 3 RED
2 2
1
356 1234 IFBF
357 IFN_MOTOR
IFN-CI NB
WHT 1
358 (212) / A1+
BLK 2
(213) / B1-
359 DRN
(214) / GND1
360 EXH_MOTOR
EXH-CI
WHT 1 NB
BLK
BLK
BLK
(348) / A2+
BLK
361 BLK 2
IRT-E ORT-E (349) / B2-
DRN
362 (349) / GND2
363 IRT ORT
364

MMP51 MMP10 MMP1 MMP3
RHB1
BNMS MCB EXPD
T7
PB1
A5P+
GND51 GND10 A5P
OAT-I - 62" A4P
A4/4-I - 59"
PL17 (A4P-X6A) - 0"
F6C EVB/88-I - 59"
F1D
R-CCH1 OAER A4P-PI - 59"
M3 EVB-230-I - 59"
IFN-PI - 3"
IFN-CI - 3" T2B EVB-208-I - 59"
Short Red - Air IFB
DS1
Pressure Tube - 10" F1A F1B F1C
H X
R63 R-HP1
460V INVERTER PANEL
T2A T1
EVB
LR1
Dwyer Dwyer
SPS2 SPS1
DS6
Magnesense Magnesense
F1A F1B F1C
DHL REC1 H T6 X

PC5 PC7
EVI-I - 74"
SD2 (Return Air Smoke Detector) - NA
PL7 (ACT3) - 107" FOR HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING PATCH PLATE:
ACT12-I - 128"
DO NOT RUN HIGH VOLTAGE WIRES INSIDE WIRE TRACK RAT (PL1)
LCT (PL2) DRT1-I - 24"
ACT-3-I - 111"
HP3 (PL3) DRT3-I - 30"
Red - Air Pressure Tube - 105"
HP1 (PL4) SRT-I - 21"
Blue - Air Pressure Tube - 100"
SVR (PL6) ORT-I - 39"
EXH-PI - 155"
SVB (PL8) DFT-I - 47"
EXH-CI - 155"
OAE (PL9) PTS-I - 30"
ID: Description: ID: Description:
CCH1 (PL10) PTD-I - 10"
EVO-I - 36" 4WV Four Way Valve OAE Enthalpy Sensor, Outside Air
CCH3 (PL11) A4P Compressor 1 Inverter OAER Relay, Outside Air Enthalpy
T4 HEAT1-I (PL15) 4WV-I - 3"
RHV1-I - 3" A4PF Compressor 1 Inverter Electrical Noise Filter OAT Temperature Sensor, Outside Air
CHV1-I - 6" A5P Outdoor Fan 1 Inverter OF1F Outdoor Fan Electrical Noise Filter 1
DAT-I - 45" A5P+ Outdoor Fan 2 Inverter OF2F Outdoor Fan Electrical Noise Filter 2
F4A F4B F4C
A5PF Outdoor Fan Electrical Noise Filter ORT Outdoor Refrigerant Temperature Sensor
ACT12 PB1 Power Block, Power Distribution
ACT3 Actuator Motor, Economizer PB1F Power Block Electrical Noise Filter
AHL Auxiliary High Limit PC5 Pressure Control, Dirty Filter Switch
85
CCH Crankcase Heater PC7 Pressure Control, Proof Airflow Switch
CHV1 Valve, Condenser Coil PTD Discharge Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
Comm Mod. Communication Module (BACnet, Lonworks, ...) PTS Suction Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
D3 DIII-NET Communication Gateway PVM1 Phase Voltage Monitor
DAT Temperature Sensor, Discharge Air R60 Energy Recovery Face and Bypass Damper Relay
DFT Defrost Temperature Sensor R63 Relay, Duct High Limit Switch
DHL Duct Hi-limit, Switch RAE Enthalpy Sensor, Return Air
DRT1,3 Discharge Refrigerant Temperature Sensor RAT Temperature Sensor, Return Air
DS1 Disconnect Switch, Unit Power R-CCH1 Crankcase Heater Relay
DS6 Disconnect Switch, Powered GFCI Receptacle REC1 Receptacle, GFCI
EVB Expansion Valve Board RES3,4 Resistor
EVBF Expansion Valve Board Electrical Noise Filter RHB1 Reheat Board, Hot Gas
EVI Indoor Expansion Valve R-HP1 High Pressure Compressor 1 Relay
EVO Outdoor Expansion Valve RHV1 Valve, Reheat Coil
EXPB,D Expansion Control Board SD1/SD2 Smoke Detector, Supply Air/Return Air
F1A,B Fuse, Control Circuit Transformer (T1), Primary SHS1 Space Humidity Sensor
F1C,D Fuse, Control Circuit Transformer (T1), Secondary SPS1 Static Pressure Sensor, Duct
F4A,B,C Fuse, 460V 3-Phase Transformer (T4), Primary SPS2 Static Pressure Sensor, Building
F6C Fuse, Powered GFCI Transformer (T6), Secondary SRT Suction Refrigerant Temperature Sensor
HEAT1 Heater Module SVB Refrigerant Bypass Solenoid Valve
HL Hi-Limit Switch, Gas Heat SVR Refrigerant Receiver Solenoid Valve
HP1,3 Hi-Pressure Switch, Refrigeration Circuits 1, 3 T1 Transformer, Main Control
IFB Interface Board T12 575/460V Primary Power Transformer
IFBF Interface Board Electrical Noise Filter T1F Main Transformer Electrical Noise Filter
IRT Indoor Refrigerant Temperature Sensor T2A,B Transformer, Control Input (115/24VAC)
LCT Temperature Sensor, Leaving Coil T4 Transformer, 230V Single Phase (460/397VAC)
LR1 Compressor Line Reactor T6 Transformer, Powered GFCI Receptacle (Line/115VAC)
Field Wiring
M1F Compressor 1 Electrical Noise Filter T7 Transformer, Reheat Control Board (115/24VAC)
M3 Contactor, Compressor 3 TB1 Terminal Block, Internal Power Distribution
Factory Wiring MCB Main Control Board TB2 Terminal Block, Field -24V
MJ Mechanical Jumper TB8 Terminal Block, Internal Signal Distribution
Factory Terminal MMP1 Manual Motor Protector, A4P Board VFD60 Variable Frequency Drive, Energy Recovery Wheel
Field Terminal MMP3 Manual Motor Protector, Compressor 3
MMP51 Manual Motor Protector, Exhaust Fan
MMP60 Manual Motor Protector, Energy Recovery Wheel
Plug Connection

Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 74: Typical 575 Volt Wiring (1 of 4) — DPS 007–015 shown with 460 to 575 Transformer
T12
(106)
101
DS1 T12-1I 22kVA HEAT1575-PI
T12-2E PB2 DS1
347/575V, 3 Phase, 60Hz T12-2E T12-1I
102 F12A F13A HEAT1
L1 T1 103A 1 2 103B 103C 1 2 103D 103E
L1 T1 (318)
H1 X1 L1
103 CUSTOMER F12B F13B
L2 T2 104A 1 2 104B 104C 1 2 104D 104E ELECTRIC HEATER
SUPPLIED L2 T2
H2 X2 L2 575V, 3 Phase, 60Hz
104 POWER F12C F13C
L3 T3 105A 1 2 105B 105C 1 2 105D 105E 34.6 FLA
L3 T3
(102) 30A H3 X0 X3 35A L3
105 Wire for CW 575V 460V
Electric Heater
phase monitor 105F MMP1
106 PB2 PB2
GLG1 GFR1
107A L1 T1 110A
107 T1 T1
108A L2 T2 110B
108 T2 T2
109A L3 T3 110C
109 T3 T3
(140) L1 L2 L3 T4
/ CMP_L1 GFR1
110 1290VA
(141)
/ CMP_L2
111 (142)
/ CMP_L3
T1 T2 T3 N TB1
112 1 F4 2 113B 11
114A 113A
113 TB1 11
8
116B
CCH_230V / (150) (152) / CCH_N
114
115
TB1 TB1
116 9 116A 10
GFR1
GF-I GF-I
117 116B X3A 113A
3 1
118
119
120C
120A
116A
113A
120B
A4P-PI
120
121 3 2 1 1 3
X10A X1A
122
PB2 PVM1 A4P
REC1 LR1-I PC0702-1(A) CMP1
123 123A CMP1-PI
T1 3 124A U U
LN-H LN-N 1 NB
124B G P1
124 T2 4 125A V V M
X11A
LD-H LD-N 2
125 125B LR1 3
T3 5 P2 126A W W GND
X41A X5A 3
1 2 1 2 N3 P3
126
MMP10 INDOOR_FAN
PB2 IFN-PI NB
127 1
128A L1 T1 128B L1
T1
128
T2
129A L2 T2 129B 2 L2 M
3
A4/41-I
A4/5-I
A4/7-I
129 3
130A L3 T3 130B L3
T3
130 GND10 4
131A GND
OFN1
U U
131 BLK NB
1 2 1 2 N1 P1 1
V
132 X3A X5A WHT V M
X1A
MMP51 EXH_FAN1 2
3
EXH-PI NB W W CTRL
133 1 RED
L1 T1 134A L1 A5P 3
134 PC0511-1(A) 1 YEL

L2 T2 135A 2 L2 M 1
2 BLU
3 2
135 3 3 ORG
X2A
L3 T3 136A L3 3
4 PNK
X4A X51A 4
136 GND51 4 1 2 1 2 N2 P2 5 GRY
137A GND 5
137
138
MMP3 CMP3
CMP3-PI
139 M3 NB
A5/7-I
A5/51-I
A5/4-I
L1 T1 L1 T1 140A U
(110) / CMP_L1
140
(111) / CMP_L2
L2 T2 L2 T2 141A V M
141 3
L3 T3 L3 T3 W GND OFN2
142A
(111) / CMP_L3 NB
142 U U
BLK
1 2 1 2 N1 P1 1
V
143 X3A X5A WHT V M
X1A
2
3
144 W W CTRL
RED
3
A5P+
145 PC0511-2(A)
1 YEL
1
146 2 BLU
2
3 ORG
X2A
3
147 4 PNK
X4A 4
1 2 5 GRY
5
148
149
PB2 F1A A5PJMP-I
150A 1 2
150 T1
(114) / CCH_230V
2A
151 R-CCH1 CCH1
F1B 1 9 CCH1-I x1 x2 CCH1-I
460V PRI. T1 113A 152A 114A
152B 1 2 (114) / CCH_N
152 T3 300VA
MB.HB
2A H1 H3 H2 H4 (305)
153 M3 CCH3
22 21 CCH3-I x1 x2 CCH3-I
113A 154A 114A
154
MB.HB
TB1 F1C X1 X2 (307) TB1
155 1 160A XF 155A 3
1 120V SEC. 3
4A
156
1 3
157 3G
155A
158
160A 155A
159 SPD SPD-I
160A 120 COM T2B
1
160 155A 120V CLASS 2
120V_H 2 120V_N / (160) 120V_N
75VA
161 (202) 161A (160)
(302) GND TB1 3G (202)
24V
TB1 TB1 (302)
162 24 COM
4 163A 163B 5
163 5
T2B_24V T2B_N
164 (248) (248)
(357) (357)
165

Wiring Diagrams
Figure 74 continued: Typical 575 Volt Wiring (2 of 4) — DPS 007–015 shown with 460 to 575 Transformer
(160) (160)
201
120V_H 120V_N
202
PVM1
203
160A 204A 155A
1(123) 8 120 COM T2A
204
120V CLASS 2
205 75VA
TB1 GF1-I GF1-I TB1 24V TB1

206 6 GFR1 12 207A 7
YEL YEL 24 COM 207B
6 1 4 7
207 (117)
6 7
208
MCB 7G
209A 207B
209 T1-G 207B
SA Smoke T1-G0
TIME CLOCK OR
210 Detector TENNANT OVERIDE
TB2 TB2 207B
101 T_CLOCK R3-4
209A 102 211A
211 NB DI3
212 RA Smoke (354)

SA Smoke Emergency A+ A1+ /
Detector Mod Bus (358)
Detector Off
213 TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 Connection (355)
R63 B- B1- /
103 104 105 106 (359)
209A MJ MJ MJ 209A 214A 301G Mount Sensor
214 DI4 RS485 (355)
9 (244) 5 GND1 / In Supply Air Duct
(359)
R63 (217) DAT
215 DAT-I
216A WHT
DI1 AI1
216 PC5 12 (244) 8
BLK NB
217A 1 3 217B T7-M1
DI2
217 FILTER DRN 301G
217A RAT
218 T10-M RAT-I
TB8 WHT
CBL217-I AI2
219 WHT 311 219C
SPS1 TB1 + 24VDC 219B BLK NB
T7-M2
MB TB1 - BLK TB8
220 T9-X6
301G 302 301G
DRN DRN OAT
221 OAT-I
(217) BLK
CBL221-I
222 WHT NB
SPS2 TB1 + AI3 BLK
MB TB1 - BLK
223 T9-X8 CBL227-I
301G ZNT1
DRN BLKTB2 SEN1/S
X3-AI NB
224 OVERRIDE
TB8 303 120
225A RED
TB2 T8-M2
225 SHS1 219C GND/C
24VDC 121
NB 131 303
226A X5-AI
226 OUT COOLING &
Humidity 126
227A SET1/P
HEATING
Sensor COM T9-M1 WHTTB2 SETPOINT
227 127 X4-AI TB2
V+
132
}
228 (DDC Sensor Only)
101
WALLSTAT
LCT LCT-I
229 Leaving Coil WHT DISCHARGE AIR
T8-X2
Temperature GRN TEMPERATURE
230 NB BLK EXTERNAL RESET
T8-M1 DRN 133
}
231 301G CBL232-I 132G
DRN TB2
WHT
T8-X1 CO2/MIN OA
232 (217)
124 /OA FLOW
BLK (SEE IM 919-3 PAGE 29)
233
125
DRN
234
121G
235 ALARM OUTPUT

DO9 DO9 TB2 TB2
C9-10
209A 236A 207B
236 117
DO10 115
DO10
ACT3-I 237A
237 PL7
1 FAN OPERATION
238 ACT3
GRY 3 WHT 310
NB 3 X7-AO
239 BLK 2 BLK
2
301G
DRN
240
OAE-I
209A BLK 24V 3 OAER
OAE
NO NC
241 OAE-I
242A 242B WHT 13 14
RAE + + 1
(311)
242 242C 207B RED 207B

S SR COM
RAE-E
243 R63
DHL
NO NC
209A 1 3 244A 13 14 207B

(214)
(216)
244
TB2 SD1 TB2
209A 207B
245
122 NB 123
SD2
246
(163) (163)
EXPD
247 T2B_24V T2B_N
SVR
C2 DO2 DO2 SVR-I SVR-I
248 163A 248A 1 2 163B
249 MB.HB
PL5 4WV PL5 4WV-I
DO4 DO4 4WV-I 1 2
250 250A 1 2 163B
251 NB
SVB-I SVB SVB-I
C3-4 DO3 DO3
252 163A 252A 1 2 163B
PTS-I MB.HB
253 WHT
PTS S X1
NB BLK 254A
254 - T8-M1
TB8 304 R-HP1
RED DO1
+ +5V / (259) DO1
255 255C 12 8 RED
DRN 301G 255 / (362)
PTD-I (303)
256 PTD BLK C1
- WHT
NB 256 / (362)
WHT
257 S X2 SRT
SRT-I
RED BLK
+ +5V / (259) X6
258 301G TB8 TB8
DRN
(255) 305 255A 258B 307 BLK NB
/ +5V +5VDC T9-M1
259 DRT1 (258)
DRT1-I
BLK DIP SWITCH
X3
260 ON
MB.HB TB8
BLK 260A OFF
T8-M2
261 306 1 2 3 4 5 6
SW6 MUST
DRT3
262 DRT3-I BE ON
BLK WHEN LAST
263 MB.HB BLK
X4
264
265

Wiring Diagrams
(160) (160)
301
120V_H HP1 120V_N
PL4 NB PL4 R-HP1
NO NC
302 HP1-I 1 2 HP1-I
160A H C 303A 13 14 155A
(307)
(255)
303
MCB
(152)
304 R-CCH1
NO NC
C1 DO1 DO1B
160A 305A 13 14 155A
305
HP3
(140) (154)
NO NC
1 H C 9 5 C2 DO2B A1 A2
160A 307B 307C 155A
(141)
(142)
307
(303)
308
309 DI5 R5-6

307B 155A
310
OAER
160A 311A
311 DI6
9 (242) 5
312
313
314
315
316
317
HEAT1
DO3 DO3 HEAT1ES-CI
318 318A RED
C
319
C3
320A BLK
I
320
ELECTRIC
321 HEATER
SCR CONTROL
322
NB
323 HEAT1ES-CI
EXPD 324A WHT
X5-AO +W
324 (247)
325A BLK
T9-M1 -R
325 301G
DRN
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
IRT
338 IRTD-I
BLK
AI1
339
BLK
T7-M1
340 ORT
ORTD-I
341 BLK
AI2
342 BLK
T7-M2
343 DFT
DFT-I
BLK
344
NB
BLK
AI3
345
346
347 EVID-I
BLU
M1+
348 BLK
M1-
EVI BRN SM1
M2+
349 NB WHT
M2-
COM
350 EVOD-I
BLU
M3+
351 BLK
M3-
EVO BRN SM2
M4+
352 NB WHT
M4-
COM
353
354 CBL345-I WHT

A1+ /(212)
BLK
B1- / (213)
355 DRN
GND1 / (214)
(163) (163)
356 T2B_N T2B_24V A2+ /(361)
B2- / (361)
SPL1
357 GND2 / (362) IFN_MOTOR
163B
163A
IFB-I IFN-CI NB
WHT 1
358 CHK1 (212) / A1+
+ - GND BLK 2
(213) / B1-
1 3 MOD A4/4-I
359 359A A4P DRN
1 1 1 (214) / GND1
ACS3
ACS1
(120)
X4A
360 360A EXH_MOTOR

3 1 2 2 2 EXH-CI
WHT 1 NB
IFB X6A-2I (356) / A2+
361 IFBA-I 255 256 BLK 2
(362) (356) / B2-
362B 255D (255) (257) WHT
3 3 DRN
24VAC
16V
362 (357) / GND2
TN2
363A BLK
X6A
1 GND 2
363 DIP SWITCH
RED
2
1
364 1234
365

Leave room for second comms card
MMP51 MMP10 MMP1 MMP3

BUSBAR
PVM1 BUSBAR
TB8 EXPD
BNIP MCB
PB2
F4
GND51 GND10
M3
TB2 TB1
X
GFR1 R63 R-CCH1R-HP1OAER
IFB
ACS3
N
Modbus
ACS2
T3
ACS1
T2 T1
T4 T1
L3
24V L2
DS1 Customer Wiring Only L1

F1C F1B F1A
CHK 1
H
SPD1
ON
T2A T2B
SPS1 SPS2
REC1
FOR HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING
DO NOT RUN HIGH VOLTAGE WIRES INSIDE WIRE TRACK
DHL
PC5
89
575V Transformer Fuse Panel
ID: Description: ID: Description:

4WV Four Way Valve MMP3 Manual Motor Protector, Compressor 3
A4P Compressor 1 Inverter MMP51 Manual Motor Protector, Exhaust Fan
A4PF Compressor 1 Inverter Electrical Noise Filter MMP60 Manual Motor Protector, Energy Recovery Wheel
A5P Outdoor Fan 1 Inverter MPB1 Contactor, Dual Disconnect Circuit 1
A5P+ Outdoor Fan 2 Inverter OAE Enthalpy Sensor, Outside Air
A5PF Outdoor Fan Electrical Noise Filter OAER Relay, Outside Air Enthalpy
ACT12 Actuator Motor, Revocery Wheel OAT Temperature Sensor, Outside Air
ABC F12 ACT3 Actuator Motor, Economizer OF1F Outdoor Fan Electrical Noise Filter 1
AHL Auxiliary High Limit OF2F Outdoor Fan Electrical Noise Filter 2
CCH Crankcase Heater ORT Outdoor Refrigerant Temperature Sensor
CHV1 Valve, Condenser Coil PB1 Power Block, Power Distribution
Comm Mod. Communication Module (BACnet, Lonworks, ...) PB1F Power Block Electrical Noise Filter
D3 DIII-NET Communication Gateway PB2 Power Block, Circuit 2 Dual Disconnect
DAT Temperature Sensor, Discharge Air PC5 Pressure Control, Dirty Filter Switch
ABC F13
DFT Defrost Temperature Sensor PC7 Pressure Control, Proof Airflow Switch
DHL Duct Hi-limit, Switch PTD Discharge Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
DRT1,3 Discharge Refrigerant Temperature Sensor PTS Suction Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
DS1 Disconnect Switch, Unit Power PVM1 Phase Voltage Monitor
DS2 Disconnect Switch, Circuit 2 Dual Disconnect R63 Relay, Duct High Limit Switch
DS6 Disconnect Switch, Powered GFCI Receptacle RAE Enthalpy Sensor, Return Air
ECB1 Ebtron Control Board RAT Temperature Sensor, Return Air
EVB Expansion Valve Board R-CCH1 Crankcase Heater Relay
EVBF Expansion Valve Board Electrical Noise Filter REC1 Receptacle, GFCI
EVI Indoor Expansion Valve RES3,4 Resistor
EVO Outdoor Expansion Valve RHB1 Reheat Board, Hot Gas
EXPB,D Expansion Control Board R-HP1 High Pressure Compressor 1 Relay
F1A,B Fuse, Control Circuit Transformer (T1), Primary RHV1 Valve, Reheat Coil
F1C,D Fuse, Control Circuit Transformer (T1), Secondary SD1/SD2 Smoke Detector, Supply Air/Return Air
F4A,B,C Fuse, 460V 3-Phase Transformer (T4), Primary SHS1 Space Humidity Sensor
F6C Fuse, Powered GFCI Transformer (T6), Secondary SPD Surge Protective Device
GFR1 Ground Fault Relay SPS1 Static Pressure Sensor, Duct
HEAT1 Heater Module SPS2 Static Pressure Sensor, Building

HL Hi-Limit Switch, Gas Heat SRT Suction Refrigerant Temperature Sensor
HP1,3 Hi-Pressure Switch, Refrigeration Circuits 1, 3 SVB Refrigerant Bypass Solenoid Valve
ICT Inverter Compressor Temperature SVR Refrigerant Receiver Solenoid Valve
IFB Interface Board T1 Transformer, Main Control
IFBF Interface Board Electrical Noise Filter T12 575/460V Primary Power Transformer
IRT Indoor Refrigerant Temperature Sensor T1F Main Transformer Electrical Noise Filter
Field Wiring
LCT Temperature Sensor, Leaving Coil T2A,B Transformer, Control Input (115/24VAC)
LR1 Compressor Line Reactor T4 Transformer, 230V Single Phase (460/397VAC)
Factory Wiring M1F Compressor 1 Electrical Noise Filter T6 Transformer, Powered GFCI Receptacle (Line/115VAC)
M3 Contactor, Compressor 3 T7 Transformer, Reheat Control Board (115/24VAC)
Factory Terminal M60 Contactor, Constant Speed Recovery Wheel TB1 Terminal Block, Internal Power Distribution
MCB Main Control Board TB2 Terminal Block, Field -24V
Field Terminal MJ Mechanical Jumper TB8 Terminal Block, Internal Signal Distribution
MMP1 Manual Motor Protector, A4P Board VFD60 Variable Frequency Drive, Energy Recovery Wheel
Plug Connection

Wiring Diagrams
Sequence of Operation
Operating States
The transition from any operating state to another is graphically Fan Only
represented in Figure 75. The outside air damper will modulate to the minimum position
and based upon the sensor inputs, the unit will go into one of
Figure 75: Operating State Diagram the four running states - “Heating,” “Cooling,” “Economizing,”
or “Minimum DAT.” If the control temperature is between its
setpoint and its dead band, the unit will remain in the “Fan
Only” state.
Heating (Electric Resistance, Gas Furnace, or Hot

Water Heat)
The unit’s heating mode of operation is controlled by the
control temperature and the heating setpoint temperature. The
unit goes into the heating mode of operation by analyzing the
control temperature.
The control temperature can be either the return temperature
or the space temperature.
The return temperature is typically used for VAV units and the
space temperature is typically used for CAV units.
The unit goes into the heating mode of operation when the
control temperature (return or space temperature) is below the
heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband.
Example - If the heating setpoint is 68.0°F and the deadband
is 1.0°F, the unit will not go into the heating mode of operation
until the control temperature reaches 67.4°F.
When this takes place, the heating mode of operation will begin
and the 1st stage of heating operation will start.
The next stage, up or down, will take place after 4 minutes.
This “4 minutes” is called the stage timer. The gas or electric
heat module will continue to stage up as long as the control
temperature is below the heating setpoint by more than ½
the heating setpoint deadband. The unit will stage down if the
maximum discharge air temperature of 120°F is reached. Gas
units with one gas valve have 2 stages of heating and units
Start Up with two gas valves have 4 stages of heating.
With a “start up” command from the “OFF” State the unit will Auxiliary heating will be used with mechanical (heat pump)
default into the “Start Up” state of operation for 3 minutes. heating to maintain set point.
During this time, the fan is OFF.
Minimum DAT
Recirculation This control mode is designed to temper the air in the ductwork
Next, the unit will transition into the “Recirculation” state of when in heating mode. When the unit is in the “Fan Only” state
operation for another 3 minutes. During this time, the outside and the Discharge Air Temperature is less than the minimum
air damper will close and the fan will turn ON, thereby mixing discharge air temperature limit, “Minimum DAT” control is
the air in the ductwork and the space. initiated. The unit will turn on minimum heat until the discharge
air temperature exceeds the limit.

Mechanical Cooling The unit goes into the cooling mode of operation when the
control temperature (return temperature) is above the change-
Constant Volume (Space Comfort Controller) over setpoint by more than ½ the deadband.
The control temperature for a CAV unit is typically the space Example - If the change over temperature is 70.0°F and the
temperature. A space temperature sensor must be field deadband is 1.0°F, the unit will not go into the cooling mode of
installed into the occupied space and connected to the unit operation until the return temperature reaches 70.6°F.
controller.
When this takes place, the cooling mode of operation will begin
The unit goes into the cooling mode of operation when the and the 1st stage of compressor operation will start.
control temperature (space temperature) is above the cooling
The unit controller will turn ON the next stage of compressor
setpoint by more than ½ the deadband.
operation, or turn off a stage of compressor operation, to
Example - the cooling setpoint is set to 70.0°F and the maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint within the
deadband is 1.0°F, the unit will not go into the cooling mode of deadband. When a compressor stage turns ON, the next
operation until the space sensor reaches 70.6°F. compressor stage up or down will not take place for the next 4
When this takes place, the cooling mode of operation will begin minutes. This “4 minutes” is called the stage timer.
and the 1st stage of compressor operation will start. When a cooling stage is initiated no further operation will
The unit controller will turn ON the next stage of compressor take place within the stage timer limit. Reference the Cooling
operation, or turn off a stage of compressor operation, to Setup menu for the adjustable stage time value. In the above
maintain the cooling setpoint temperature within the deadband. example, the unit will stage down or turn OFF the cooling mode
When a compressor stage turns ON, the next compressor of operation when the return temperature reaches 69.4°F.
stage, up or down, will not take place for the next 4 minutes.
This “4 minutes” is called the stage time. Reference the Economizer
“Cooling Setup” menu for the adjustable stage time value.
When the economizer is enabled, the outside air temperature
When a cooling stage is initiated no further operation will take is below the changeover setpoint, and the differential enthalpy
place within the stage timer limit. In the above example, the switch (if installed) is made, the economizer becomes the
unit will stage down or turn OFF the cooling mode of operation first stage of cooling. It will modulate to control to either the
when the cooling setpoint reaches 69.4°F. discharge air temperature (VAV) or space temperature (CV).
Variable Air Volume (Discharge Air Controller) Every 4 minutes, the unit can then either add mechanical
cooling if the economizer is at 100% open, continue
The unit’s cooling mode of operation is controlled by the
economizing, or if the control temperature is satisfied, return to
control temperature, the change-over temperature, and the
minimum position and transition back to “Fan Only” mode.
discharge air temperature. The unit goes into the cooling mode
of operation by analyzing the control temperature. The control If the enthalpy switch breaks or the outside air warms, the unit
temperature for a VAV system is the return temperature. will exit economizing and continue to mechanically cool while
returning to the minimum position for ventilation.

Preparing the Unit for Start Up
Pre-Start of Unit Spring Isolated Fans

DANGER DPS 016–028 Only
Electric shock and moving machinery hazard. Can
cause severe equipment damage, personal injury, or
WARNING
death. Moving machinery hazard. Can cause severe injury
ordeath. Before servicing equipment, disconnect power
Disconnect and tag out all electrical power before
and lockoff. More than one disconnect may be required
servicing this equipment.
to de-energize unit. Prior to operating the fans for the
All start-up and service work must be performed only first time, refer to Check, Test and Start Procedures on
by trained, experienced technicians familiar with the page 94.
hazards of working on this type of equipment.
Releasing Spring Mounts
Read and follow this manual: “MicroTech III Unit
Controller” (OM 1141) before operating or servicing. The supply fan on DPS 016–028 units is spring isolated due to
the relatively larger fan and increased applied energy.
Bond the equipment frame to the building electrical
ground through grounding terminal or other approved The spring-mounted supply fan is locked down with four
means. shipping bolts for shipment. Remove each shipping bolt before
operating the fans. Figure 76 shows a typical spring mount
All units are completely run tested at the factory to promote with a height adjustment nut and a shipping bolt.After removing
proper operation in the field. However, to ensure proper the shipping bolts, rock the fan assembly by hand to check for
operation once the unit is installed, the following check, test, freedom of movement.
and start procedures must be performed to properly start the
unit. To obtain full warranty coverage, complete and sign the Adjusting Spring Mounts
check, test, and start form supplied with the unit and return it to During operation all fans should ride level. Level the fan
Daikin Applied. assembly by performing the following:
A representative of the owner or the operator of the equipment 1. Loosen the 3/8" cap screw (do not remove).
should be present during start-up to receive instructions in the
operation, care, and maintenance of the unit. 2. Loosen the spring cap nut.
3. Rotate the 5/8" adjustment nut counter-clockwise to raise
the fan assembly, or clockwise to lower the fan assembly.
4. Tighten the 3/8" cap screw.
5. Tighten the spring cap nut.
Figure 76: Spring Mounts

Servicing Control Panel Components Power-Up

1. Close the unit disconnect switch.
DANGER
2. Power should now be supplied to the control panel.
Hazardous voltage. May cause severe injury or
death. Phasing the Rebel Unit
Disconnect electric power before servicing equipment The supply and return fans, inverter compressor, and
condenser fans are all inverter driven and are DC voltage
Before Start-Up motors. Care has to be taken to ensure proper phasing.
1. Remove shipping bolts from compressor(s). 1. With a phase rotation indicating tool ensure phase
2. Verify that the unit is completely and properly installed rotation per the wiring diagrams on the inside door of the
with ductwork connected. control panel.
3. Verify that all construction debris is removed, and that

the filters are clean. Fan Start-Up
4. Verify that all electrical work is complete and properly 1. Verify all duct isolation dampers are open.
terminated. 2. Place the unit into the “Fan Only” mode through the
5. Verify that all electrical connections in the unit control keypad.
panel are tight, and that the proper voltage is connected. 3. The controller should enter the “Startup Initial” operating
6. Verify all nameplate electrical data is compatible with the state. If the fan does not run, check the manual motor
power supply. protectors or that the circuit breakers have not tripped.
7. Verify the phase voltage imbalance is no greater than 4. Verify the rotation is correct.
2%.
8. Verify that gas piping is complete and leak tight.
9. Verify that the shutoff cock is installed ahead of the
furnace, and that all air has been bled from the gas lines.
10. Verify installation of gas flue and outside air vents.
11. Manually rotate all fans and verify that they rotate freely.
12. Verify that the evaporator condensate drain is trapped
and that the drain pan is level.
13. If unit is curb mounted, verify that the curb is properly
flashed to prevent water leakage.
14. Review the equipment and service literature, the
sequences of operation, and the wiring diagrams to
become familiar with the functions and purposes of the
controls and devices.
15. Determine which optional controls are included with the
unit.

Check, Test and Start Procedures
Economizer Start-Up Perform the Following Procedure:

1. Check whether the outdoor air is suitable for free cooling. NOTICE
2. At the keypad, set the cooling setpoint low enough so the
controller calls for cooling. Venting refrigerant to atmosphere is not allowed per
3. Place the unit into cooling mode through the keypad most local laws and/or codes.
menu.
4. Observe the outdoor air dampers: 1. At the keypad, set the cooling setpoint low enough so
that the controller will call for cooling.
a. If the outdoor enthalpy is low, the control algorithm
should start to modulate the dampers open to 2. Verify that compressor #1 starts. If the compressor motor
maintain the discharge air setpoint. hums but does not run, verify that it is phased correctly
between the inverter board and compressor.
b. If the outdoor enthalpy is high, the dampers should
maintain their minimum position. 3. The compressor should operate continuously while there
is a call for cooling. If the compressor cycles on and off
NOTE: It may not be possible to check the economizer
on its low pressure switch, perform the following:
operation in both low and high enthalpy states on the
same day. If this is the case, repeat this procedure on a. Verify that the circuit is not short of refrigerant.
another day when the opposite outdoor air enthalpy
conditions exist. b. Check for low airflow across the evaporator coil.
c. Check for clogged filters.
Compressor Start-Up d. Check for restricted ductwork.
e. Check for very low temperature return air entering the
CAUTION unit.
Low ambient temperature hazard. Can cause f. Verify that the liquid line components, expansion
compressor damage. Do not attempt to start up and valve, and distributor tubes are feeding the
check out the refrigeration system when the outdoor air evaporator coil.
temperature is below 0°F.
g. Verify that all air handling section panels are closed.
4. Verify that the condenser fans are cycling and rotating
With the supply fan operational, prepare for compressor properly (blowing air upward). When the compressor
operation. starts, at least one condenser fan should also start.
1. Verify that the crankcase heaters are operating. These Checking Subcooling
should operate for at least 24 hours before starting
the compressors. Following are recommendations for checking subcooling:
1. Run unit until it reaches steady state. Close the unit
section doors. Running the unit with its doors open will
affect system operation.
2. Subcooling can be read from the MicroTech III unit
controller.

Set Up for Optimum Control Air Balancing

The Outdoor air sensor must be calibrated. WARNING
• Compare the MicroTech III OAT reading to an external Moving machinery hazard. Can cause severe
temperature measuring device. See Appendix, Figure personal injury or death. Do not use a mechanically
85 on page 118 go to the Quick Menu and OA Temp driven tachometer to measure the speed of return fans
[ pink path.] on this fan arrangement. Use a strobe tachometer.
• If there is more than 1.0°F difference between the
two readings [Note the OAT reading should be taken The following should be performed by a qualified air balancing
after the outdoor fans have been running for at least
technician:
1 minute.] then correct this difference on the keypad.
Go to Service Menus (Appendix, Figure 81 and then 1. Check the operating balance with the economizer
Figure 84 on page 116), Sensor Offsets [ orange dampers positioned for both full outdoor air and minimum
path,] find OA temp, and make the required adjustment. outdoor air.
The adjustment has a range setting of +/– 10.0°F.
2. Verify that the total airflow will never be less than that
Proper discharge and suction super heat is critical required for operation of the electric heaters or gas
furnace.
• Suction super heat is monitored at the display
screen. Appendix, see Figure 81 and then Appendix, 3. When the final drive adjustments or changes are
Figure 83 on page 114, go to commission unit, expansion complete, check the current draw of the supply fan
valve set up, and super heat [ yellow path.] motors. The amperage must not exceed the service factor
• Discharge super heat is not shown directly but is stamped on the motor nameplate
the difference between discharge temperature and Minimum and maximum airflow/rpm settings can be adjusted
saturated discharge temperature and both can be
using the MicroTech III controller. Refer to OM 1141 for details.
monitored at the display screen. See Figure 81 and
Figure 83.
—— Go to commission unit (Figure 83), expansion valve
set up, and disch sat tmp [ yellow path.]
—— Go to view/set unit (Figure 81 and Figure 82),
temperatures, DRT1 [inverter compressor] and DRT 2
[fixed speed compressor] [ green path]
• If, after all motor speeds are constant +/– 5 hz for 15
minutes for either compressor, suction superheat
drops below 5°F, or discharge superheat drops below
18°F, or discharge superheat drops below 30°, then
proceed as follows.
—— Set the SS Hi Base to 2°F. See Figure 81 and Figure
83, go to commission unit, expansion valve set up,
and SS Hi Base [ yellow path.]
—— Contact the factory to diagnose why super heat is
too low.
• If super heats do not reach steady state [less than
10°F variation for 2 minutes] then
—— Set the SS Hi Base to 2°F. See Figure 81 and Figure
83. Go to commission unit, expansion valve set up,
and SS Hi Base [ yellow path.]
—— Contact the factory to diagnose why the unit is
hunting.

Energy Recovery Wheel

Prestartup Checks Diameter Seal Adjustment
1. By hand, turn wheel clockwise (as viewed from the pulley
side) to verify wheel turns freely through 360° rotation. WARNING
2. During rotation confirm wheel segments are fully Keep hands away from rotating wheel! Contact with
engaged in the wheel frame and segment retainers are rotating wheel can cause physical injury.
completely fastened
1. Loosen diameter seal adjusting screws. See Figure 77.
3. With hands and objects away from moving parts,
2. Move adjustable diameter seals away from wheel.
apply power and confirm wheel rotation. Wheel rotates
clockwise as viewed from the pulley side. 3. Using a ¼ inch feeler gauge, adjust the diameter against
the wheel. See Figure 77.
4. If wheel has difficulty starting, disconnect power and
inspect for excessive interference between the wheel 4. Tighten diameter seal adjusting screws.
surface and each of the (4) diameter seals. 5. Apply power per the start up procedure.
Figure 77: Energy Recovery Wheel Adjusting

Final Control Settings
Final Control Settings
Final Control Settings Maintaining Control Parameter Records

Controller Settings for Normal Operation Daikin recommends that the MicroTech III controller’s setpoints
and parameters be recorded and saved for future reference.
When all start-up procedures are completed, set the controls If the microprocessor control board requires replacement, this
and program the MicroTech III controller for normal operation. record facilitates entering the unit’s proper data.
Use the following list as a guide; some items may not apply to
your unit.
1. Set the heating and cooling parameters as required for
normal unit operation:
a. Temperature\Zone Cooling\
b. Temperature\Zone Heating\
c. Temperature\Discharge Cooling\
2. Set the low ambient compressor lockout setpoint as
required. Do not set it below 20°F.
3. Set the high ambient heat lockout temperature setpoint.
4. Set the alarm limits as required.
5. Set the duct static pressure control parameters as
required.
6. Set the building static pressure control parameters as
required.
7. Set the economizer control parameters as required.
8. Set the date and time in keypad menu.
9. Set the operating schedule as required using keypad
menus.
NOTE: Unit operation may also be controlled by the building
automation system.

Maintenance
Maintenance
Performing Service Maintenance Planned Maintenance

Installation and maintenance must be performed only by Preventive maintenance is the best way to avoid unnecessary
qualified personnel who are experienced with this type of expense and inconvenience. Have this system inspected at
equipment and familiar with local codes and regulations. regular intervals by a qualified service technician. The required
frequency of inspections depends upon the total operating time
IMPORTANT and the indoor and outdoor environmental conditions. Routine
Gas or Hot Water Piping: A qualified Architect or maintenance should cover the following items:
Systems HVAC Design Engineer familiar with piping • All blowers, including furnace inducer, have sealed
design, local codes and regulations, must provide piping bearings. No lubrication is necessary.
design. The following manufacturer recommendations • Tighten all wire connections.
serve as a general guide and should not replace a
• Clean the outside and inside coils mechanically or with
qualified professional’s piping system design.
cold water, if necessary. Usually any fouling is only
matted on the entering air face of the coil and can be
DANGER removed by brushing or vacuuming.
Moving machinery and electrical power hazards. May • Clean or replace the filters as required.
cause severe personal injury or death. Disconnect • Check for blockage of the condensate drain. Clean the
and lock off all power before servicing equipment. condensate pan as needed.
• Check the power and control voltages.
WARNING • Check the running amperage of all motors.
Sharp edges are inherent to sheet metal parts, • Check all operating temperatures and pressures.
screws, clips, and similar items. May cause personal • Check and adjust all temperature and pressure controls
injury. as needed.
Exercise caution when servicing equipment. • Check and adjust all damper linkages as needed.
• Check the operation of all safety controls.
Servicing Control Panel Components • Check the condenser fans and tighten their setscrews.
Disconnect all electric power to the unit when servicing control • Periodic removal of snow drifts will be required in
panel components. Before servicing, always inspect units for northern climates
multiple disconnects to ensure all power is removed from the
control panel and its components. Unit Storage
DANGER Location
Hazardous voltage. May cause severe injury or The Rebel is an outdoor unit. However, the construction
death. schedule may dictate storage either on the ground or in its
final position at the site. If the unit is stored on the ground,
Disconnect electric power before servicing equipment. additional precautions should be taken as follows:
More than one disconnect may be required to de-
energize the unit. • Make sure that the unit is well supported along the length
of the base rail.
• Make sure that the unit is level (no twists or uneven
ground surface).
• Provide proper drainage around the unit to prevent
flooding of the equipment.
• Provide adequate protection from vandalism, mechanical
contact, etc.
• Make sure all doors are securely closed and all latches closed.
• Units should be fitted with covers over the supply and
return air openings.

Maintenance
Preparation for Storage Figure 78: Rebel Filter Section
Supply Fans
1. Depending on local climate conditions, condensate
may collect on components inside the units. To prevent
surface rust and discoloration, spray all bare metal parts
with a rust preventive compound.
Cabinet Sections
Once a month, open a door on each section and verify that no
moisture or debris is accumulating in the unit.
Control Compartment
1. Daikin Applied recommends that the electronic control
equipment in the unit be stored in a 5% to 95% RH (non-
condensing) environment.
2. It may be necessary to put a heat source (light bulb) in
the main control panel to prevent the accumulation of
atmospheric condensate within the panel. The location
and wattage of the heat source is dependent on local
environmental conditions. Fans
3. Check the control compartment every two weeks to The supply, condenser and exhaust fan motors are
confirm that the heat source is functional and is adequate permanently lubricated and require no periodic lubrication.
for current conditions.
Vibration Levels
Filter Replacement Each unit as shipped is trim balanced to operate smoothly. To
This unit is provided with filters are show in Table 33. These provide satisfactory operation after shipping and installation,
filters are disposable and should be replaced periodically. use accepted industry guidelines for field balancing fans.
Unit is equipped with a filter pull to assist in this process. See NOTE: Excessive vibration from any cause contributes to
Figure 78. premature fan and motor bearing failure. Monitor
overall vibration levels every six months of operation.
Table 33: Filter Sizes An increase in levels is an indication of potential
trouble.
Cabinet Size Filter Size
Vibration Causes
003—006 4 - 16" × 16"
1. Wheel imbalance.
007—015 4 - 24" × 24"
016—028 9 - 18" × 24" a. Dirt or debris on wheel blades.
b. Wheel distorted from overspeed.
Restart 2. Bent shaft.
After extended storage, perform a complete start up. Inevitable 3. Motor imbalance.
accumulations of dirt, insect nests, etc. can contribute to
4. Fan section not supported evenly on foundation.
problems if not cleaned out thoroughly prior to start up. In
addition, thermal cycling tends to loosen mechanical and
electrical connections. Following the startup procedure helps Periodic Service and Maintenance
discover these and other issues that may have developed • Check all moving parts for wear every six months.
during the storage interval.
The Rebel unit is equipped with a direct drive,variable
speed fan/motor combination. When equipped, the
exhaust fan will be the same. There are no belts or
pulleys to maintain. The bearing are permanently sealed
and do not require periodic greasing.

Maintenance
Refrigerant Charge
The Rebel unit has many configurable options that can affect MicroTech III keypad instructions for charging and/
the refrigerant charge. Actual unit charge is given on the unit’s or evacuation
data plate found on the inside of the control panel. The Rebel
Evacuating the charge:
unit uses electronic expansion valves that maintain peak
efficiency. Liquid sub-cooling and suction super heat float and • Navigate to the Exp Valve Set-Up Menu
should not be used as an indication that charge needs to be • Set ManCtrl EV Op=Man
added or removed from the system. If a leak is suspected, the
• Navigate to the Manual Control Menu
full charge should be removed and weighed. Weight should be
compared against the unit nameplate data. Unit should be re- • Set Manual Ctrl=ManCtrl
charged with the amount given on the unit nameplate. • Set RcvSol Valve=Open (Heat Pump only)
POE and PVE oil is hygroscopic and does absorb moisture • Set BP Sol Valve=Open
when exposed to atmosphere. Steps should be taken • Set EVO Cmd=100% (Heat Pump only)
to minimize exposure time to atmosphere during any • Set EVI Cmd=100%
maintenance where the sealed system is to be opened. • Reclaim refrigerant
Rebel 003–015 refrigerant systems use only Polyvinylether
(PVE) oil. Rebel 016–028 refrigerant systems use only Charging the system:
Polyester (POE) oil.
Static Charge (Step 1)
IMPORTANT • Navigate to the Manual Control Menu
Do not use POE oil in DPS 003–015 refrigerant systems • Set RcvSol Valve=Close (Heat Pump only)
and do not use PVE oil in DPS 016–028 refrigerant
• Set Reheat Valve=50% (if present)
systems.
• Set EVO Cmd=30% (Heat Pump only)
• Set EVI Cmd=30%
Re-charging the unit
• → When PTS>20psi: Navigate to Exp Valve Set-Up
The entire system must be evacuated using a suitable vacuum • Set ManCtrl EV Op=Auto
pump. The quality of vacuum is measured using a suitable
micron gauge that has been calibrated. The vacuum level Dynamic Charge (Step 2)
reading should be taken directly from the sealed system, not at • Clear any active alarms (ex: Charge Loss: Problem
the vacuum pump. The minimum vacuum level is 300 microns generated while removing charge)
Hg. The vacuum pump should be isolated from the system and
• Navigate to Manual Control
the observed. Decay should not be greater than 500 microns
after 15 minutes. • Set BP Sol Valve=Close
The crankcase heaters should be on during the evacuation • Set Supply Fan=On
procedure. This will help boil any dissolved refrigerant in the oil. • Set SAF Spd Cmd=50%
R410A is a zeotropic refrigerant that is made up of more • Set INV/OF Ena=On
than one compound. It must be charged as a liquid from the • Set INV=On
canister. Charging is to be done by weight and must match the • → When Clg State=Normal:
unit nameplate found on the inside of the control panel door. • Navigate to Manual Control
When re-charging the unit there might be alarms in the MT III • Set INV Cmp Cmd=50%
controller and the Building Automation System that need to be • Set BP Sol Valve=Open
cleared.
• Set OA Fan=On
• Set OA Fan Cmd=50%
Vary INV Cmp Cmd to maintain Te (temperature evaporator)

below 59°F. Keep an eye on Discharge Superheat to shoot for
minimum of 18°F, adjust the refrigerant being entered into the
system if Discharge Superheat begins to drop below 18°F.
See OM 1141-1 for more information on keypad operation.

Maintenance
Servicing Refrigerant Sensors or Switches Phase Voltage Monitor (PVM)

The phase voltage monitor (Figure 80) is designed to protect
CAUTION three-phase loads from damaging power conditions. A
Severe loss of charge may occur if the high microprocessor-based voltage and phase sensing circuit
refrigerant pressure switch is replaced before constantly monitors the three-phase voltages to detect harmful
reclaiming the refrigerant. Replace pressure switch power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected,
after reclaiming refrigerant. its output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay (Trip
Delay). The output relay reactivates after power line conditions
return to an acceptable level for a specified amount of time
Servicing Optional Electric Heater (Restart Delay). The trip and restart delays prevent nuisance
tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions.
DANGER
There are two LEDs on the face of the PVM (“1” in Figure 80)
Hazardous voltage. May cause severe injury or to indicate the following items in Table 34.
death.
Disconnect electric power before servicing equipment. Figure 80: Phase Voltage Monitor
More than one disconnect may be required to de-
energize the unit.
If the electric heater is not operating properly, a qualified

electrician should perform the following to check if the heater is
damaged:
1. Measure continuity through all fuses.
2. Check that all electrical connections are tight. Look for
signs of arcing.
3. Check the resistance to ground for each circuit. It should
be infinite.
4. Check the resistance phase to phase for each circuit.
5. Check all contactors.
Servicing the Compressor Ground Fault

Interrupter Table 34: LED Indication
The Rebel 003–015 units are equipped with a ground fault Status LED Indicator
interrupter on the compressor(s). This is a two part device with a Normal operation, no faults, relay Green LED - steady on
current sensing donut on the power wires to the compressor(s) energized
and a PCB. The device is intended for personal safety by Loss of input phase (relay Red LED - flash twice, off, flash twice,
deenergized) off, etc.
continuously monitoring the balance between the three phase
Red LED - flash twice, off, flash twice,
power and the neutral conductor. It is not intended to provide Voltage unbalance (relay deenergized) off, etc.
overcurrent or short circuit protection to the equipment. High or low voltage (relay de- Red LED - steady on
energized)
The device works by opening the 120V controls circuit in a fault Phase reversal (relay deenergized) Red LED - pulse on, off, on, off, etc.
condition. An open condition on the ground fault interrupter Restart delay (fault cleared, PVM Green LED - pulse on, off, on, off, etc.
indicates the compressor has been grounded. pending restart, relay de-energized)
Figure 79: Ground Fault Interrupter Other features:

• Standard 2% to 8% variable voltage unbalance (“3” in
Figure 80).
• Standard 1 to 500 second variable restart delay (“2”).
• Standard 1 to 30 second trip delay (“4”) (except loss of
phase, which trips at 1 second non-adjustable).

Maintenance
Cleaning Option E Coated Coils

Routine Quarterly Cleaning of Option E Coated Coil
WARNING Surfaces
Prior to cleaning the unit, turn off and lock out the main Quarterly cleaning is essential to extend the life of an Option
power switch to the unit and open all access panels. E Coated Coil and is required to maintain warranty coverage.
Coil cleaning shall be part of the unit’s regularly scheduled
The following cleaning procedures are recommended as part maintenance procedures. Failure to clean an Option E Coated
of the routine maintenance activities for Option E Coated Coils. Coil will void the warranty and may result in reduced efficiency
Documented routine cleaning of Option E Coated Coils is and durability in the environment.
required to maintain warranty coverage.
For routine quarterly cleaning, first clean the coil with the
Remove Surface Loaded Fibers below approved coil cleaner (see approved products list under
Recommended Coil Cleaners section, Table 35). After cleaning
Surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed prior to water
the coils with the approved cleaning agent, use the approved
rinse to prevent further restriction of airflow. If unable to back
chloride remover (under the Recommended Chloride Remover
wash the side of the coil opposite that of the coils entering air
section) to remove soluble salts and revitalize the unit.
side, then surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed with
a vacuum cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft Table 35: Option E Coated Coil Recommended Cleaning
non-metallic bristle brush may be used. In either case, the tool Agents
should be applied in the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can
be easily damaged (fin edges bent over) if the tool is applied Cleaning Agent Reseller Part Number
Hydro-Balance Corp
across the fins. P.O. Box 730
Enviro-Coil Concentrate H-EC01
NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose, Prosper, TX 75078
800-527-5166
against a surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and
Enviro-Coil Concentrate Home Depot H-EC01
dirt into the coil. This will make cleaning efforts more Chlor*Rid Int’l, Inc.
difficult. Surface loaded fibers must be completely P.O. Box 908
Chloride Remover Chlor*Rid DTS
removed prior to using low velocity clean water rinse. Chandler AZ 85244
800-422-3217
Periodic Clean Water Rinse
A monthly clean water rinse is recommended for coils that are
applied in coastal or industrial environments to help to remove
chlorides, dirt and debris. An elevated water temperature (not
to exceed 130ºF) will reduce surface tension, increasing the
ability to remove chlorides and dirt. Pressure washer PSI must
not exceed 900 psig and the nozzel should remain at leat 1 foot
from the coil to avoid damaging fin edges.

Service and Warranty Procedures
Service and Warranty Procedures
Replacement Parts Order the replacement compressor through the Daikin Parts
Department (Minneapolis).
When contacting Daikin for service or replacement parts,
provide the model number, serial number, and unit part 1. Contact the Daikin Parts Department for compressor
number of the unit as stamped on the serial plate attached availability.
to the unit. For questions regarding wiring diagrams, provide 2. Send a completed parts order form to the Daikin Parts
the number on the specific diagram. If replacement parts are Department.
required, include the date of unit installation, the date of failure,
3. The Parts Department processes the order and
an explanation of the malfunction, and a description of the
the compressors are shipped from our Dayton, OH
replacement parts required.
warehouse via ground transportation. If next-day air
is required, indicate this on the parts order form and a
Scroll Compressor freight charge will be billed to your account. Air freight
All Daikin Rooftop products include a first-year parts only costs are not covered under the Daikin warranty.
warranty. The warranty period extends 12 months from startup 4. After the failed compressor is replaced, return it to Daikin
or 18 months from date of shipment, whichever comes first. Parts Department with a Return Goods Tag attached,
Labor to install these parts is not included with this warranty. which you will receive in the mail. It must be attached to
Compressors are considered a part and are included in this the compressor. The Return Goods Tag has instructions
standard warranty. on where to send the compressor. If the compressor
is not returned, you will be billed for the replacement
All Compressors compressor.
Replacement compressors for Daikin Rooftop Units can be 5. Consideration may be given at this time to a compressor
obtained from the Daikin Service Parts department. teardown analysis, depending on the history of failures.
The decision to replace the failed portion of the compressor
tandem, as opposed to replacing the entire tandem, must be In-Warranty Return Material Procedure
decided based on the following.
Material other than compressors may not be returned except
1. In warranty: Warranty only covers replacement of the by permission of authorized personnel of McQuay International
failed portion of the tandem. at Minneapolis, Minnesota.
2. Out of warranty: The customer decides whether to A “return goods” tag will be sent to be included with the
replace the entire tandem or just a portion. returned material. Enter the information as called for on the tag
3. Some equipment may include the extended 2nd - 5th in order to expedite handling at out factories and issuance of
year compressor warranty option. credits. All parts shall be returned to the factory designated on
the return goods tag, transportation charges prepaid.
The return of the part does not constitute an order for
replacement. A purchase order for the replacement part
must be entered through your nearest Daikin representative.
The order should include the component’s part number and
description and the model and serial numbers of the unit
involved.
If it is determined that the failure of the returned part is due to
faulty material or workmanship within the standard warranty
period, credit will be issued on the customer’s purchase order.
NOTE: 1. Unit does not require high pressure switch testing
2. Refrigerant pressures can be checked from the
MT III controller. Refrigerant gages are not needed.
3. Ensure proper unit phasing
4. Compressor 3 might not operate during startup
due to ambient conditions and compressor
operating envelope.

Warranty Registration Form
Rebel Warranty Registration Form
Equipment Warranty Registration Form

To comply with the terms of Daikin Applied Warranty, complete and return this form
within 10 days to the Warranty Department of Daikin Applied.
Check, test, and start procedure for Rooftop roof mounted air conditioners with or without heat
recovery and roof mounted air handlers.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Job Name: ____________________________________________________________ GOI No.: _______________________________

Installation address: _____________________________________________________________________________________________
City: _________________________________________________________________ State: _________________________________
Purchasing contractor: ___________________________________________________________________________________________
City: _________________________________________________________________ State: _________________________________
Name of person doing start-up: ____________________________________________________________________________________

Company name: ________________________________________________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
City/State/Zip: __________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT INFORMATION
Unit model number:______________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit serial number: ______________________________________________________________________________________________
Compressor 1 model number: ____________________________________________ Serial number: __________________________
Compressor 3 model number: ____________________________________________ Serial number: __________________________
NOTE: 1. Unit does not require high pressure switch testing

2. Refrigerant pressures can be checked from the MT III controller. Refrigerant gages are not needed.
3. Ensure proper unit phasing.
4. Compressor 3 might not operate during startup due to ambient conditions and compressor operating envelope.
13F-4157 (05/15) ©2015 Daikin Applied • (800) 432-1342 • www.DaikinApplied.com

Rebel Equipment Warranty Registration Form (continued)
Select Yes or No. If not applicable to the type of unit, select N/A.
I. INITIAL CHECK
A. Is any shipping damage visible? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
B. Has the discharge static pressure reference been properly located in the building? . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
C. Do fans turn freely? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
D. Electrical service corresponds to unit nameplate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
Volts __________ Hertz __________ Phase __________
E. Unit phased correctly? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
F. Is the main disconnect adequately fused and are fuses installed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
G. Are crankcase heaters operating, and have they been operating 24 hours prior to start-up? . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
H. Are all electrical power connections tight? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
I. Is the condensate drain trapped? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
II. FAN DATA
A. Check rotation of supply fan? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
B. Voltage at supply fan motor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2 __________ V 2–3 __________ V 1–3 __________ V
C. Supply fan motor amp draw per phase: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2 __________ A 2–3 __________ A 1–3 __________ A
D. What is the supply fan rpm? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
E. Record supply static pressure at unit in inches of H20: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
F. Record return static pressure at unit (with outside air dampers closed) in inches of H20: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
III. START-UP COMPRESSOR OPERATION
A. Are compressor shipping brackets removed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
B. Are compressors rotating in the right direction? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
C. Do condenser fans rotate in the right direction? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
D. Ambient temperature (°F): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
E. Compressor amperage:
Compressor #1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phase 1___________ Phase 2___________ Phase 3___________
Compressor #3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phase 1___________ Phase 2___________ Phase 3___________
13F-4157 (05/15) 2

IV. PERFORMANCE DATA (Unit to run at steady state for 15 minutes)
A. Discharge pressure, one compressor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit 1 _____ psig
B. Suction pressure, one compressor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit 1 _____ psig
C. Liquid temperature (°F): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
D. Suction line temperature °F from unit controller: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
E. Discharge line temperature °F from unit controller: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
F. Superheat temperature °F from unit controller: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
G. Sub-cooling line temperature °F from unit controller: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
H. Record discharge air temperature at discharge of unit (°F): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
I. Are all control refrigerant lines secure to prevent excessive vibration and wear? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
J. Are all valve caps and packing tight after start-up? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
K. Did unit control DAT to DAT setpoint? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
V. Hot Water Coil
A. Pressure test OK? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
VI. Heat Recovery
A. Heat wheel rotates freely? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
B. Heat wheel VFD operates properly? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
C. Heat wheel VFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model No. _________________________ Serial No. ___________________________
D. Check for air bypass around heat wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
VII. ELECTRIC HEAT
A. Electrical heat service corresponds to unit nameplate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
Volts _____________ Hertz _____________ Phase _____________

B. Are there any signs of physical damage to the electric heat coils? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
C. Have all electrical terminals been tightened? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
D. Does sequence controller stage contactors properly? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
E. Electric heater voltage across each phase: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___________ L1 ___________ L2 ___________ L3
F. Amp draw across each phase at each heating stage:
Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 Stage 6

Phase L1: ___________ ____________ ____________ ___________ ___________ ____________
Phase L2: ___________ ____________ ____________ ___________ ___________ ____________
Phase L3 ___________ ____________ ____________ ___________ ___________ ____________
G. FLA: L1 ___________ L2____________ L3 ___________
H. Operate electric heat with fans off. Electric heat must cycle on high limit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
13F-4157 (05/15) 3

VIII. FURNACE CHECK, TEST, & START
A. Gas pressure at main (inches w.c.): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
B. Gas pressure at manifold (inches w.c.): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
C. High limit control OK? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
D. Flame failure shutoff (seconds): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________
E. Airswitch OK? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
F. Main Gas Valve Close-Off OK? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
IX. MAINTAINING MICROTECH CONTROL PARAMETER RECORDS

After the unit is checked, tested, and started and the final control parameters are set, record the final settings. Keep these records on file
and update whenever changes to the control parameters are made. Keeping a record facilitates any required analysis and troubleshooting
of the system operation and facilitates restoration after a controller replacement.
Thank you for completing this form. Please sign and date below.
Signature _____________________________________________________________ Startup date: ___________________________
Return completed form by mail to:

Daikin Warranty Department, 13600 Industrial Park Boulevard, Minneapolis, MN 55441
or by email to: AAH.Wty_WAR_forms@daikinapplied.com
Please fill out the Daikin Applied “Quality Assurance Survey Report” and list any additional comments that could affect the operation of this unit; e.g., shipping damage, failed
components, adverse installation applications, etc. If additional comment space is needed, write the comment(s) on a separate sheet, attach it to the Survey Report and return it to
the Warranty Department of Daikin Applied with the completed Equipment Warranty Registration form.
13F-4157 (05/15) 4

Quality Assurance Survey Report
To whom it may concern:

Please review the items below upon receiving and installing our product. Select N/A on any item that does not apply to the product.
Job Name: _____________________________________________________________________ Daikin Applied G.O. No. ______________
Installation address:____________________________________________________________________________________________________
City: ___________________________________________________________________________ State: _______________________________
Purchasing contractor:__________________________________________________________________________________________________
City: ___________________________________________________________________________ State: _______________________________
Name of person doing start-up (print): ___________________________________________________________________________________
Company name: ______________________________________________________________________________________
Address: ____________________________________________________________________________________________
City/State/Zip: _______________________________________________________________________________________
Unit model number: ____________________________________________________ Unit serial number: __________________________
1. Is there any shipping damage visible? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
Location on unit ____________________________________________________________________________________
2. How would you rate the overall appearance of the product; i.e., paint, fin damage, etc.?
Excellent Good Fair Poor
3. Did all sections of the unit fit together properly? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
4. Did the cabinet have any air leakage? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
Location on unit ___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Were there any refrigerant leaks? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
From where did it occur? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping Workmanship Design
6. Does the refrigerant piping have excessive vibration? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
Location on unit ___________________________________________________________________________________
7. Did all of the electrical controls function at start-up? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
Comments _______________________________________________________________________________________
8. Did the labeling and schematics provide adequate information? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes No N/A
9. How would you rate the serviceability of the product?

10. How would you rate the overall quality of the product?
11. How does the quality of Daikin Applied products rank in relation to competitive products?
Comments _______________________________________________________________________________________
Please list any additional comments which could affect the operation of this unit; i.e., shipping damage, failed components, adverse installation applications, etc. If additional comment
space is needed, write the comment(s) on a separate sheet, attach the sheet to this completed Quality Assurance Survey Report, and return it to the Warranty Department with the
completed preceding “Equipment Warranty Registration Form”.
13-4160 (05/14) ©2014 Daikin Applied • (800) 432-1342 • www.DaikinApplied.com

Addendum follows
IM 1125-7 109

Appendix – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
The following is a description of the MicroTech III menu structure. These menus and items can all be displayed with the keypad/
display. Menu items displayed will change based on the selected unit configuration.
Figure 81: Main Menu – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Main Menu Enter Password Quick Menu View/Set Unit

Enter Password ► Enter Password ******* ► Unit State=__________ DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F Unit Status/Settings ►
Quick Menu ► Unit Status=_________ DAT Htg Spt= 85.0°F Occupancy ►
View/Set Unit ► MWU Status=________ Min DAT Limit= 55.0°F Temperatures ►
Unit State=_________ Dehum Status=______ Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F Flow Status ►
Unit Status=________ Ctrl Mode= Off Unocc Htg Spt= 55.0°F SAF Spd Control ►
MWU Status=_______ Occ Mode= Auto/Net SAF Speed= XXX% RF/EF Control ►
Dehum Status=______ HP Mode= HeatCool Duct Press= X.Xin Cooling ►
Ctrl Mode= Off Clg Capacity= XXX% DuctSP Spt= 1.0in Economizer ►
Occ Mode= Auto OAD/Econ Cap= XXX% RF/EF Cap= XXX% Min OA Damper ►
HP Mode= HeatCool ► Htg Capacity= XXX% Bldg Press= X.XXin Heating ►
Commission Unit ► Supl Htg Cap= XXX% BldgSP Spt= 0.05in Dehumidification ►
Manual Control ► Reheat Cap= XXX% IAQ PPM= XXXXppm Date/Time/Schedules ►
Service Menus ► Control Temp= XXX% OA Flw= XXXXXCFM
Trending ► Occ Clg Spt= 72.0°F MinOAFlw Spt= 2000CFM
Unit Maintenance ► Occ Htg Spt= 68.0°F OA Temp= XXX°F
For more detail go to:
BMS Communications ► Disch Air= XXX°F Rel Humidity= XXX%
Figure 82, page 112
Unit Configuration ►
Alarm Lists ►
About This Unit ►
Unit Configuration Alarm Lists About This Unit

Apply Changes= No Active Alarms ► SO_Item= 123456_12345
Unit Type= DPS(3) Alarm Log ► Unit SN= FBOU123456789
Control Type= DAT(1) App Version= 2506018xxx
Clg Type= INV(4) Cf1-15= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Cmp Config= INV1(M) Cf6-29= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Gen Clg Stgs= 1 Main BSP= X.XX
Figure 84, page 116
Low Ambient= No(0) LON BSP= X.XX
Cond Ctrl= INV(8) LON App Ver= X.XX
OA Dmpr/Econ= AirEc(3) BACnet BSP= X.XX
OA Flow Stn= None(0) D-Net BSP= X.XX
Htg Type= None(0) HMI GUID=
Htg Stages= 1 xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-
xxxxxxxxxxxx
Max Heat Rise= 100
OBH GUID=
SAF Type= EBMCAV(6)
xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-
RAF Type= None(0) xxxxxxxxxxxx
RF/EF Ctrl= None(0)
2ndDSPSnsr= No(0)
EFT/LCT Snsr= No(0)
Energy Rcvy= None(0)
Clg Circ Type= 2Air(2)
Head P Ctrl= No(0)
Bypass Ctrl= Slave(0)
Unit Size= 012
Refrig Type= R410A(2)
Reheat Type= None(0)
Unit Voltage= 460/60(2)

Commission Unit Manual Control Service Menus Trending Unit Maintenance BMS Communications
Unit Set-Up ► Manual Control= Normal Timer Settings ► Trending Ena= No Operating Hours LON Set-Up ►
Timer Settings ► Supply Fan= Off Operating Hours ► Apply Chgs= No BACnet MSTP Set-Up ►
SAF Set-Up ► SAF Spd Cmd= 0% Save/Restore Settings ► Sample Time= 300s BACnet IP Set-Up ►
RF/EF Set-Up ► INV/OF Ena= Off Active Alarms ► TrendOnOff= Off D-Net Set-Up ►
Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up ► INV Comp= Off Alarm Log ► Auto Exp Time= Network Unit Set-Up ►
Cooling Set-Up ► INV Spd Cmd= 0% Event Log (65300) Export Data= No
INV Cmp Set-Up ► Comp 3= Off Data Snapshots (65500) Clear Trend= Done
Econo Set-Up ► OA Fan= Off Alarm/Event Config Trend Full=
Min OA Set-Up ► OA Fan Cmd= 0% Analog Input Status ► Points 1–8 (Fixed) ► Figure 85, page 118
Heating Set-Up ► 4 Way Valve= Cool Universal I/O Status ► Points 9–24 (from List) ►
OA Fan Set-Up ► RcvrSol Valve= Closed Digital Input Status ► Points 25–27 (with IDs) ►
Exp Valve Set-Up ► BP Sol Valve= Closed Digital Output Status ► Points 28–30 (with IDs) ►
Defrost Set-Up ► EVI Cmd= 0% Network Input Status ►
Dehum Set-Up ► EVO Cmd= 0% Modbus Status ►
Energy Rec Set-Up ► RF/EF VFD= Off IP Set Up
D3 Set-Up ► RF/EF Spd Cmd= 0% D3 Status ► Figure 86, page 118
Alarm Configuration ► Var Cmp= Sensor Offsets ►
Var Cmp Cmd= Reset Counte= XXXX
VComp Emg Stop= Last Reset Info
Htg Valve= 0%
SCR Out= 0%
Figure 83, page 114
Htg Stg 1= Off
SCR Ena 1= Off
Htg Stg 2= Off
Htg Stg 3= Off
Figure 84, page 116
Htg Stg 4= Off
Reheat Valve= 0%
RH Output=
ERec Wheel= Off
ER Whl Cmd= 0%
ER BP Dmpr Cl= Off
ER BP Dmpr Op= Off
Alm Output= Off
Fan Op Out= Off

Figure 82: View/Set Unit – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
View/Set Unit
Unit Status/Settings ►
Occupancy ►
Temperatures ►
Flow Status ►
SAF Spd Control ►
RF/EF Control ►
Cooling ►
Economizer ►
Min OA Damper ►
Heating ►
Dehumidification ►
Date/Time/Schedules ►
Unit Status/Settings Occupancy Temperatures Flow Status SAF Speed Control RF/EF Control
Unit State= ___________ Occupancy= __________ Control Temp= XXX°F Airflow= ______________ SAF Speed= XXX% RF/EF Cap= XXX%
Unit Status= __________ Occ Mode= Auto/Net Disch Temp= XXX°F Supply Fan= __________ Speed Cmd= XXX% Speed Cmd= XXX%
MWU Status=__________ OccSrc= _____________ Return Air= XXX°F Ret/Exh Fan= _________ Duct Press= X.Xin Bldg Press- X.XXin
Dehum Status= ________ UnoccSrc= ___________ Space Temp= XXX°F DuctSP Spt= 1.0in BldgSP Spt= 0.050in
Ctrl Mode= Off Tnt Ovrde Tm= 0 min OA Temp= XXX°F IAQ PPM= XXXXPPM
Clg Status= ___________ EF/LC Temp= XXX°F OA Flw= XXXXXCFM
Htg Status= ___________ ER LAT= XXX°F MinOAFlw Spt= 2000CFM
Sup/Htg Status= _______ ER EAT= XXX°F Bldg Press= X.XXin
Econo Status= _________ DRT1= XXX°F BldgSP Spt= 0.05in
Clg Capacity= XXX% DRT3= XXX°F
Htg Capacity= XXX% SRT= XXX°F
Supl Htg Cap= XXX% DFT= XXX°F
Reheat Cap= XXX% IRT= XXX°F
SAF Speed= XXX% ORT= XXX°F
RF/EF Cap= XXX%
OAD/Econo Cap=XXX%
Rel Humidiy= XXX%
Net Emrg Ovrd= Normal
Net App Mode= Auto

Cooling Economizer Min OA Damper Heating Dehumidification Date/Time/Schedules

Occ Clg Spt= 72.0°F OAD/Econo Pos= XXX% Min OA Pos= XXX% Occ Htg Spt= 68.0°F Dehum Status= ________ Time= hh:mm:ss
Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F Vent Limit= 20% Unocc Htg Spt= 55.0°F Rel Humidity= XXX% Date= MM/DD/YY
DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F Min OA Pos= XXX% LoFlo V Lmt= 30% MWU Spt= 70.0°F Dewpoint= XXX°F UTC Diff= -60min
Occ Clg Spt= 72.0°F DCV Limit= 10% DAT Htg Spt= 85.0°F Dehum Method= None DAILY SCHEDULE
Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F Min OA Src= __________ RH Setpoint= 50% Mon= HH:MM-HH:MM
Dewpoint Spt= 50°F Tue= HH:MM-HH:MM
Reheat Spt= XXX°F Wed= HH:MM-HH:MM
Reheat Cap= XXX% Thu= HH:MM-HH:MM
Fri= HH:MM-HH:MM
Sat= HH:MM-HH:MM
Sun= HH:MM-HH:MM
Hol= HH:MM-HH:MM
HOLIDAY DATES
Hol 1=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
ONE EVENT SCHEDULE
Beg= MMMDD/YY@HH:MM
End= MMMDD/YY@HH:MM
OPTIMAL START
Enable= No
Htg Range= 0.4 ºF/min
Htg OAT= 35 ºF
Des Htg OAT= 0 ºF
Clg Rate= 0.4 ºF/min
Clg OAT= 85 ºF
Des Clg OAT= 95 ºF
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
DLS Strt Mon= Mar
DLS Strt Wk= 2nd Week
DLS End Mon= Nov
DLS End Wk= 1st Week
DLS Active= Yes

Figure 83: Commission Unit – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Commission Unit
Unit Set-Up ►
Timer Settings ►
SAF Set-Up ►
RF/EF Set-Up ►
Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up ►
Cooling Set-Up ►
INV Cmp Set-Up ► Unit Set-Up Timer Settings SAF Set-Up
Econo Set-Up ► Apply Changes= Service Time= 0min SAF Ctrl= DSP 1 ZONE VAV CONTROL CFM CONTROL
Min OA Set-Up ► RAT Sensor= Start Up= 180s AplyInputChgs= No Min Clg Spd= 40% Min CFM= 0CFM
Heating Set-Up ► 100% OA SCU= Recirculate= 180s CO2 Input= None Max Clg Spd= 100% Max CFM= 10000CFM
OA Fan Set-Up ► OAT Sensor= Zero OA Time= 0min CFM Input= None Min Htg Spd= 40% V/A @ Min CFM= 0V
Exp Valve Set-Up ► Space Sensor= Loc/Net Tnt Override= 120min BSP Input= No Max Htg Spd= 100% V/A @ Max CFM= 10 V
Defrost Set-Up ► Eng Units= English Post Heat= 0s SPEED CONTROL Space Period= 30s SAF CFM DB= 3%
Dehum Set-Up ► Unit Name= xxxxxxxxxxxx Pwd Timeout= 10min Rem SAF Cap= 25% Space Gain= 1.5 SAF CFM Period= 30s
Energy Rec Set-Up ► Rapid Start= No Low DAT= 6min DSP CONTROL Space PAT= 100s SAF CFM Gain= 0.1
D3 Set-Up ► Rapid Start Tm= 10min ClgStateDelay= 300s DSP DB= Space Max Chg= 10% SAF CFM MxChg= 5%
Alarm Configuration ► DO10 Clg= FanOp Clg Stg Time= 5min SAF Ramp Time= 60s CO2 CONTROL BSP CONTROL
Alarm/Event Config Htg Stg Time= 5min Min Period= Min PPM= 0PPM BSP DB= 0.01in
MinExStrtTm= 120s Max Spd Chg= Max PPM= 2000PPM BSP Period= 5s
MinExStopTm= 120s Duct Press 1= V/A @ Min PPM= 0V BSP Gain= 0.2
ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min Duct Press 2= V/A @ Max PPM= 10V Max Spd Chg= 4%
ER Whl Off Tm= 20min Min SAF PPM= 800PPM SAF SETUP
Max SAF PPM= 1100PPM SAF Ctrl Dly= 30s
Min PPM Spd= 50% Min Speed= 25%
Max PPM Spd= 100% VAVBox Out= _________
Max SAF Hz=
Max Vent Speed= 100%
Max SAF RPM= 2600
Max SAF Hz=
ECM Status= _________
SAF Status=
Econo Set-Up Min OA Set-Up Heating Set-Up OA Fan Set-Up

Clg Stage Time= 5min Apply Changes= No FAN SPEED RESET Htg Stage Time= 5min OA FAN STATUS
Chgover Temp= 65.0°F Min OA Reset= None Min Clg Spd= 40% Htg DB= 2.0°F OA Fan1 Spd= XXX%
Clg DB= 2.0°F BSPOAOvrd= No Des Clg Spd= 100% Htg Period= 60s OA Fan1 Cmd= XXX%
Econo Period= 30s RstLmtSnsr= None BSP RESET Htg Gain= 0.8 OA Fan1Amps= XX.XA
Econo Gain= 10 EXTERNAL RESET MinRFEFTm= 120s Htg PAT= 120s Fault Code Details ► 1
Econo PAT= 60s OA @ MinV/mA= 0% BSP OvdST= 5s Htg Max Chg= 10% OA Fan2 Spd= XXX%
Econo Max Chg= 10% OA @ MaxV/mA= 100% BSP OvdGain= 0.2 Htg Lo OAT Lk= 0.0°F OA Fan2 Cmd= XXX%
Econo Diff= 2.0°F Min V/mA= 0.0V BSP OvdMaxChg= 4% Htg Hi OAT Lk= 55.0°F OA Fan2Amps= XX.XA
Clg Reset= None Max V/mA= 10.0V DAMPER LIMITING EffHtgHiOATLk= 55.0°F Fault Code Details ► 1
Min Clg Spt= 55.0°F CO2 RESET RstTLmt= 32.0ºF SuplHtgHiOATLk= 55.0°F REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS
Min Clg Spt @= 0 IAQ Reset= Yes RstTSmplTm= 5s OAT Diff= 2.0°F PTS= XXX.Xpsi
Max Clg Spt= 65.0°F PPM@DCVLmt= 800PPM RstTGain= 0.2 Htg Reset= None PTD= XXX.Xpsi
Max Clg Spt@= 100 PPM@VntLmt= 1000PPM RstPAT= 60s Min Htg Spt= 55.0°F Disch Sat Tmp= XXX.X°F
Max OAT Lmt= IAQ PPM= XXXXPPM RstTMaxChg= 4% Min Htg Spt @= 0 EffDshSatTSpt= XXX.X°F
Min OAT Lmt= Min PPM= 0 PPM 0–30% OA Max= 30% Max Htg Spt= 120.0°F OA Temp= XXX°F
Calibrate OAD= Max PPM= 2000 PPM Min Inc Rate= 0.03 Max Htg Spt@= 100 INV Fin Temp= XXX°F
Pos Sw Open= V/A @Min PPM= 0.0/V Max Inc Rate= 1.0 Min DAT Ctrl= Yes OA FAN SET UP
Max Sw Diff= V/A @Max PPM= 10.0/V Min DAT Limit= 55.0°F DischSatTDiff=
Pos Sw Close= CFM RESET Occ Heating= Yes DischSatTDB=
Min Sw Diff= OA Flow= XXXXXCFM Unocc Diff= 55.0°F OA Fan Period=
OAD Sw Status= MinOAFlwSpt= 2000CFM Htg Wmup Tm= 60s OA Fan Gain=
Field Stn Rst= Yes Htg Hld Period= 240s OA Fan PAT=
Field Stn Cfg= VDC MWUSensor= RAT OA Fan Max=
Min CFM= 0 CFM ECM Status=
Max CFM= 10000 CFM
V/A @Min CFM= 0.0V
IFB COMM STATUS ► 2
V/A @Max CFM= 10.0V
OA CFM DB= 3%
OA CFM Period= 30s
OA CFM Gain= 0.1
OA CFM Max Chg= 5%

1, 2 See Figure 84, page 117 for

the expansion information
RF/EF Set-Up Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up Cooling Set-Up INV Cmp Set-Up
RF/EF Ctrl= None Ctlr Temp Src= RAT Clg Stage Time= 5min COMPRESSOR STATUS COMPRESSOR SETUP
SPEED CONTROL Use Tstat Spt= No Clg DB= 2.0°F Clg State= ____________ Clg Lo OAT Lk= 55°F
Rem ExhF Cap= 5% Occ Clg DB= 2.0°F Clg Lo OAT Lk= 55ºF Htg State= ____________ Htg Lo OAT Lk= 0.0ºF
Rem RAF Cap Clg Period= 60s OAT Diff= 2.0°F INV Cmp Spd= XXX.X% Htg Hi OAT Lk= 55.0ºF
BSP CONTROL Clg Gain= 0.1 Clg Reset= None INV Spd Cmd= XXX.X% EffHtgOATLk= 55.0ºF
BSP DB= 0.010in Clg PAT= 600s Min Clg Spt= 55.0°F VCmp Oil Status= OAT Diff= 2ºF
BSP Period= Max Clg Chg= 5.0°F Min Clg Spt @= 0 Comp 3=_____________ INV Period= 20s
BSP Gain= Occ Htg DB= 2.0°F Max Clg Spt= 65.0°F Fault Code Details ► INV Gain= 2.5
Max Spd Chg= Htg Period= 60s Max Clg Spt@= 100
RF/EF SET UP Htg Gain= 0.1 Unocc Diff= 3°F
INV Port Temp= XXX.XºF
INV Fin Temp= XXX.XºF
1 INV PAT= 10s
INV Max Chg= 15%
RFEF Ctrl Dly= Htg PAT= 600s INV Amps= XX.XA Oil Management=
Min Speed= Max Htg Chg= 5.0°F REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS Low Oil Time=
MinExStrtTm= Cal D Rem Spt @10°C= PTS= XXX.Xpsi Oil Boost Time=
MinExStopTm= Cal D Rem Spt @50°F= PTD= XXX.Xpsi Inv Man Dsbl=
MinExOAPos= Cal D Rem Spt @30°C= 4 Way Valve=__________ Comp 3 Man Dsbl=
MinExSAFCap= Cal D Rem Spt @80°F= RcvrSol Valve=_________ VFD Status=
ExhOnOAPos= 40% Demand Shed= BP Sol Valve=_________ VFD Alm/Wrn=
ExhMxOAPos= 100% Clg Demd Shed= IFB COMM STATUS ►2
Max Vent Spd= 100% Htg Dmd Shed=
Max RFEF RPM= 2600 Clg Shed Rate=
ECM Status= _________ Htg Shed Rate=
Exp Valve Set-Up Defrost Set-Up Dehum Set-Up Energy Rec Set-Up D3 Set-Up
EXP VALVE STATUS EXP VALVE SETUP Defrost State= _________ Dehum Method= None Energy Rcvy= Yes Itouch Vers= __________
EVI Pos= XXX% SSH DB= 2.0ºF Manual DF= No RH DB= 2% ER Wheel= ___________ Unit D3 Addr= 1–00
EVO Pos= XXX% SH Lo Base= 5.0ºF MinCmpOpTm= 10min Dewpoint DB= 2°F Wheel Speed= XXX% Set D3 Addr= No
EVStatus=____________ SH Hi Base= 9.0ºF MinAccCmpTm= 40min RH Period= 30s Whl Spd Cmd= XXX% OA Unit Num= 0
REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS Htg EVI Meth= SbC MaxFrostTm= 120min RH Gain= 1 ER LAT= XXX°F OA Unit Amps= 0
PTS= XXX.Xpsi IC SC Spt= 9.0ºF Defrost Temp= XXºF LCS Lo Gain= ER EAT= XXX°F OA Unit Addr= 0
PTD= XXX.Xpsi IC SC DB= 2.0ºF Tdef Adj= 0.0ºF RH PAT= 30s Min ExhT Diff= 2.0°F Set OA Unit= No
Suction SH= XX.XºF HtgSC EVI Min= 0% CmpOpTime= XXXmin RH Max Chg= 10% Max ExhT Diff= 6.0°F Rst All OA= No
Discharge SH= XX.XºF Clg EVO Meth= SbC AccCmpOpTm= XXXmin Dehum Ctrl= Occupied ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min Min Load= 20%
Subcooling= XX.X°F OC SC Spt= 9.0ºF LoFrstAccTm= XXXmin Sensor Loc= Return ER Whl Off Tm= 20min Max Load= 50%
Eff SSH Spt= XX.X°F OC SC DB= 2.0ºF HiFrstAccTm= XXXmin Mn Lvg Coil T= 45.0°F Rel Humidity= XXX% HiCapReset= No
EffSH Base= XX.X°F ClgSC EVO Min= 0% Mx Lvg Coil T= 52.0°F Min Whl Spd= 5% DATLoDiff= 10.0ºF
Eff SC Spt= XX.X°F ManCtrl EV Op= Auto Min Rheat Spt= 55.0°F Intersect Pt= XXX.XºF Eco Method= None
Eff SC Lo Lmt= XXX% Max Rheat Spt= 65.0°F Fst Mgnt Meth= Timed DATHiDiff= 10.0ºF
SRT= XXX°F RH Sens Type= VDC OA Frst Temp= -5.0°F OA Enth Max= 25.5 BTU/lb
Disch Sat Tmp= XXX.X°F RH Min Sig= 0V Defrost Time= 5min OA Hum Max= 0.0107lb/lb
Sucn Sat Tmp= XXX.X°F RH Max Sig= 10V Defrost Period= 60min OAT Max= 84ºF
IRT= XXX°F Min Dehum Spd= 33% Defrst On Tm= 1s Temp Display= DAT
ORT= XXX°F Max Dehum Spd= 100% Defrst Off Tm= 24s Low Speed= 33%
RH Min Pos= 15% ER Whl Period= 30s Med Speed= 66%
RH Dec Rate= 1.0%/s ER Whl Gain= 1.0 Hi Speed= 100%
RH OutMaxV= ER Whl PAT= 30s
BackUp RH Ena= ER Whl Chg= 10%
Lo ERLAT Cnplk=
Cap Limiting=

Figure 84: Service Menu – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Service Menus
Timer Settings ►
Operating Hours ►
Save/Restore Settings ►
Active Alarms ►
Alarm Log ►
Alarm Configuration ►
Analog Input Status ►
Universal I/O Status ►
Digital Input Status ►
Digital Output Status ►
Network Input Status ►
Modbus Status ►
D3 Input Status ► Timer Settings Operating Hours Save/Restore Active Alarms
Sensor Offsets ► Service Time= 0min Supply Fan= XXXXXh Settings Alm Count: xx Clr Alms= No
Reset Counte= XXXX Start Up= 180s Ret/Exh Fan= XXXXXh Save Params= +Alarm 1: Alarm Type ►
Recirculate= 180s Cmp Cooling= XXXXXh Rstr Params= +Alarm 2: Alarm Type ►
Zero OA Time= 0min INV Comp= XXXXXh Rstr Factory= ●
Tnt Override= 120min Comp 3= XXXXXh SaveToCard= ●
Post Heat= 0s Heating= XXXXXh LoadFromCard= ●
Pwd Timeout= 10min Cmp Heating= XXXXXh Create Trace=
Trace to SD=
+Alarm 10: Alarm Type ►
Low DAT= 6min Economizer= XXXXXh
ClgStateDelay= 300s Tnt Override= XXXXXh
Bypass Valve= 300s Dehumid= XXXXXh
Clg Stg Time= 5min ER Wheel= XXXXXh
Htg Stg Time= 5min
MinExStrtTm= 120s
MinExStopTm= 120s
ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min
ER Whl Off Tm= 20min
Network Input Status Modbus Status D3 Status Sensor Offsets

Net OAT In= XXX.XºF SF MB Status=_________ D3 Comm Sts= ________ Disch Air= 0.0ºF
Net Space In= XXX.XºF RF/EF MB Status=______ D3 Addr Err= __________ Return Air= 0.0ºF
NetCurrState= _________ ER MB Status=________ D3 On/Off= ___________ OA Temp=
NetNextState= _________ IFB MB Status=________ D3 Mode= ____________ Space Temp= 0.0ºF
NetTmToNxtSt= XXXXXmin OF Status= ___________ D3 Clg Spt= XXX.XºF OA Temp= 0.0ºF
Net App Mode= ________ VCMP MB STATUS D3 Htg Spt= XXX.XºF EF/LC Temp= 0.0ºF
Net Cl Ena Sw= X.X SAF VFD Ex Flt= D3 Fan Spd= __________ ER LAT= 0.0ºF
Net Cl Ena VI= XXX% RXF VFD Ex Flt= D3 Min Load= XXX% ER EAT= 0.0ºF
Net Ht Ena Sw= X.X ER VFD Ex Flt= D3 Max Load= XXX% DRT1= 0.0ºF
Net Ht Ena VI= XXX% OF VFD Ex Flt= D3 Eco Ena= __________ DRT2= 0.0°F
Net Ec Ena Sw= X.X D3 MB STATUS D3 OA Enthalpy= XXXBTU/lb DRT3= 0.0ºF
Net Ec Ena VI= XXX% MB Resistance= OA Hum Ratio= g/kg SRT= 0.0ºF
Net SAF Cap= XXX% ECM CONFIG D3 SWVers= XXXXXXXXXX DFT= 0.0ºF
Net ExhF Cap= XXX% D3 MB Status=_________ OAAdd1–16= __________ IRT= 0.0ºF
Net Space IAQ= XXXXPPM MB Resistance= Yes OAAdd17–32= _________ ORT= 0.0ºF
Net Rel Humid= XXX% ECM Config= Done OAAdd33–49= _________
Net DATClgSpt= XXX.XºF OAAdd50–64= _________
Net DATHtgSpt= XXX.XºF SetOAAddr= XX
nviSetpoint= XXX.XºF CurrOAAddr= XX
OccManCmd= _________ CurrOAAmps= XXXA
Net Min OA= XXX% CurrOARLA= XXXA
nvoEffSpt= XXX.XºF
nciOccClgSpt= XXX.XºF
nciOccHtgSpt= XXX.XºF
nciHVACType= _________

Alarm Log Alarm/Event Analog Input Status Universal I/O Status Digital Input Status Digital Output Status
Configuration
Log Count: xx Clr Log= No ► MCB Al1= XXXXXXXX MCB X1= XXXXXXXX MCB DI1= ____________ MCB DO1= __________
+/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type ► ALARM LIMITS MCB Al2= XXXXXXXX MCB X2= XXXXXXXX MCB DI2= ____________ MCB DO2= __________
+/-Alarm 2: Alarm Type ► Hi Disch Temp= 170°F MCB Al3= XXXXXXXX MCB X3= XXXXXXXX MCB DI3= ____________ MCB DO3= __________
● Lo Disch Temp= 40°F EMD AI1= XXXXXXXX MCB X4= XXXXXXXX MCB DI4= ____________ MCB DO4= __________
● Hi Return Temp= 120°F EMD AI2= XXXXXXXX MCB X5= XXXXXXXX MCB DI5= ____________ MCB DO5= __________
● ALARM OUT CONFIG EMD AI3= XXXXXXXX MCB X6= XXXXXXXX MCB DI6= ____________ MCB DO6= __________
+/-Alarm 10: Alarm Type ► Faults= Fast MCB X7= XXXXXXXX EMA DI1= ____________ MCB DO7= __________
Problems= Slow MCB X8= XXXXXXXX EMB DI2= ____________ MCB DO8= __________
Warnings= Off EMB X1= XXXXXXXX EMD DI1= ____________ MCB DO9= __________
ALARM DELAYS EMB X2= XXXXXXXX EMD DI4= ____________ MCB DO10= __________
Frz Delay Time= 30s EMB X3= XXXXXXXX EMB DO1= __________
Air Flw Ing=120s EMB X4= XXXXXXXX EMB DO2= __________
Sens Alm Dly= 30s EMB X5= XXXXXXXX EMB DO3= __________
Temp AlmDly= 30s EMB X6= XXXXXXXX EMB DO4= __________
ALARM CONFIG EMB X7= XXXXXXXX EMB DO5= __________
Emerg Stop= ManClr EMB X8= XXXXXXXX EMB DO6= __________
Alm Log to SD= EMD X1= XXXXXXXX EMD DO1= __________
EVENT CONFIG EMD X2= XXXXXXXX EMD DO2= __________
Show Events= EMD X3= XXXXXXXX EMD DO3= __________
Event Log to SD= EMD X4= XXXXXXXX EMD DO4= __________
SNAPSHOT CONFIG EMD X5= XXXXXXXX EMD DO5= __________
Ena SnapShots= EMD X6= XXXXXXXX EMD DO6= __________
Show SnapShots= EMD X7= XXXXXXXX
SnapShots to SD= EMD X8= XXXXXXXX
Alarm Lists Active Alarms Alarm Log Alarm Details

Active Alarms ► Alm Count: xx Clr Alms= No Log Count: xx Clr Log= No ► +/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type
Alarm Log ► +Alarm 1: Alarm Type ► +/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type ► MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
+Alarm 2: Alarm Type ► +/-Alarm 2: Alarm Type ► INV/OF Flt Code Details► 1
● ● IFB Comm Status ► 2
● ●
● ●
+Alarm 10: Alarm Type ► +/-Alarm 50: Alarm Type ►
IFB Comm Status Fault Code Details
IFB SW Vers= VP0329008 ACTIVE FAULT CODES
IFBCommStatus=____ INVAlarmCode=______
PrvCommStatus=_______ Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS OF1AlarmCode=_______
ACS1 DataRcvd=_______ Code Text
ACS3 DataRcvd=_______ OF2AlarmCode=_______
Code Text
PREVIOUS FAULT CODES
PrvINVAlmCode=_______
Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
PrvOF1AlmCode=______
Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
PrvOF2AlmCode=______
Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

Figure 85: BMS Communications – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
BMS Communications
LON Set-Up ►
BACnet MSTP Set-Up ►
BACnet IP Set-Up ►
D-Net Set-Up ►
Network Unit Set-Up ►
IM 918 IM 917 IM 916

LON Set-Up BACnet MSTP Set-Up BACnet IP Set-Up D-Net Set-Up Network Unit Set-Up
Neuron ID= xxxxxxxxxxxx ApplyMSTPChgs= No ApplyIPChgs= No ApplyD-NetChgs= No Space Sensor= Local/Net
SndHrtBT= 60s Name= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Name= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DHCP= On UNIT MODE SETTINGS
RcvHrtBT= 30s Dev Instance= xxxxxxxxxx Dev Instance= xxxxxxxxxx Act IP= 0.0.0.0 Ctrl Mode= Off
MinSndTm= 0s MSTP Address= XXX UDP Port= 47808 ActMsk- 0.0.0.0 Occ Mode= Auto/net
Comm Status=_________ Baud Rate= 76800 DHCP= On ActGwy= xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx RESET OPTIONS
LON BSP= X.XXX Max Master= 127 Act IP= 0.0.0.0 Gvn IP= 127.0.0.1 Clg Reset= None
LON App Ver= XXXX Max Info Frm= 10 ActMsk- 0.0.0.0 GvnMsk= 255.255.255.0 Htg Reset= None
Unit Support= English ActGwy= xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx GvnGwy= 127.0.0.1 Min OA Reset= None
Term Resistor= No Gvn IP= 127.0.0.1 Remote Srv En= Disable Apply Changes= No
NC Dev 1= 0 GvnMsk= 255.255.255.0 Comm Status= ________ HEAT/COOL CHANGEOVER
NC Dev 2= 0 GvnGwy= 127.0.0.1 D-net BSP= X.X.XX Ctrl Temp SRC= RAT
AHU Loc/Net= Network Unit Support= English Occ Clg Spt= 72°F
Comm Status= ________ NC Dev 1= 0 Occ Htg Spt= 68°F
Rst Out of Srvc= No NC Dev 2= 0 FAN CONTROL OPTIONS
BACnet BSP= X.X.XX AHU Loc/Net= Network SAF Ctlr= DSP
Comm Status= ________ RF/EF Ctlr= Tracking
Rst Out of Srvc= No
BACnet BSP= X.X.XX
Figure 86: Trending – Keypad/Display Menu Structure
Trending
Trending Ena= No
Apply Chgs= No
Sample Time= 300s
TrendOnOff= Off
Export Data= No
Clear Trend= Done
Points 1–8 (Fixed) ►
Points 9–24 (from List) ►
Points 25–27 (with IDs) ►
Points 28–30 (with IDs) ►
Points 1–8 (Fixed) Points 9–24 (from List) Points 25–27 (with IDs) Points 28–30 (with IDs)
Point 1= UnitSt Point 9= None Point 25 Point 28
Point 2= Clg% Point 10= None ID= F0AF0000 ID= F0AF0000
Point 3= Htg% Point 11= None Type= 0000 Type= 0000
Point 4= SAF% Point 12= None Mem Num= 0100 Mem Num= 0100
Point 5= OAD/Eco% Point 13= None Point 26 Point 29
Point 6= CtrlTmp Point 14= None ID= F0AF0000 ID= F0AF0000
Point 7= DAT Point 15= None Type= 0000 Type= 0000
Point 8= OAT Point 16= None Mem Num= 0100 Mem Num= 0100
Point 17= None Point 27 Point 30
Point 18= None ID= F0AF0000 ID= F0AF0000
Point 19= None Type= 0000 Type= 0000
Point 20= None Mem Num= 0100 Mem Num= 0100
Point 21= None
Point 22= None
Point 23= None
Point 24= None

Figure 87: Optional Outdoor Air Monitor – Changing the System of Units
Press and release ↑/↓ during normal operation to select
Enter
↑/↓ (Select) Enter (Move →) Enter (Move →) (Action, Move →→)
During
Normal Operation Esc (Move ←) Esc (Move ←) Esc
(Move ←←)
IP/SI Units ↓ *IP/SI=IP SYS Set System? IP/SI=IP SYS ↓
Sets system of units to I-P

(FPM, CFM, sq.ft., in.w.g., °F)
Set Up ↓↑
IP/SI=SI SYS ↑
Comm Set Up ↓↑
Sets system of units to S-I
(MPS, LPS, sq.M., Pa., °C)
Ethernet Set Up ↓↑
Diagnostics ↑
* Factory Default/Current Setting

Figure 88: Optional Outdoor Air Monitor – Set Up Menu
Press and release ↑/↓ during normal operation to select
Enter (Move →) Enter (Move →) Enter (Move →) Enter (Action, Move →→)
Esc (Normal Operation) Esc (Move ←) Esc (Move ←) Esc (Move ←←)
See Figure 87: System Units

IP/SI Units ↓
Menu, page 119
Set Up ↓↑
FS1 units determined by

Visible only when LCD U/M=CFM OUT1 U/M setting
1
FS1=5000FPM ↓↑
1
LCD1 U/M=FPM ↓ 1
AR1=0.000 SQF ↓↑ 1
OUT1 U/M=FPM ↓↑ 1
OUT1=4-20mA ↓↑
1
FS1=10000FPM for GF1
or
1
FS1=5000CFM ↓↑
1
FS1=10000CFM for GF1
Set LCD1 Units? Set Area1? Set Out1 Units? 2

Set Out1? Set FS1?
FS1=5000FPM ↓↑
LCD1 U/M=FPM ↓ AR1=0.00SQF ↑ OUT1 U/M=FPM ↓ 2
OUT1=0–10V ↓
FS1=10000FPM for GF1
or
Set area between In addition, “SW1” must be set
Displays airflow in FPM. 0.00 and 999.99 sq.ft. Area Outputs airflow in FPM. to the VDC position to change FS1=5000CFM ↓↑
affects the LCD display reading airflow output to 0–10VDC.
and output when set for CFM. FS1=10000CFM for GF1
Fullscale analog output value

from 100 to 15,000 for FPM
(up to 999,999 for CFM) in
increments of 1.
Value must be ≥ LL1 + 10 or, if
LL1=0, value must be ≥ 100.
LCD1 U/M=CPM ↑ OUT1 U/M=CPM ↑ 2

OUT1=0–5V ↓↑
In addition, “SW1” must be set

Displays airflow in CFM (User Outputs airflow in CFM (User to the VDC position to change
must input AR1 area. must input AR1 area. airflow output to 0–5VDC.
2
OUT1=4–20mA ↑
In addition, “SW1” must be set to

the mA position to change airflow
output to 4–20mA.

1. Factory default/current setting

2. If a selection is made that requires SW1 to be set, the LCD displays “Set
SW1 on Board”.
3. If a selection is made that requires SW2 to be set, the LCD displays “Set
SW2 on Board”.
1
FILTER1=0 ↓↑ 1
FLOW BUFF=30 ↓↑ 1
ALT=0 ↓↑ 1
OUT2 TYP=TEMP↓↑ 1
OUT2=4-20mA ↓↑
Adjust Filter1? Set Flow Buff? Set Altitude Set Out2 Type? 3
Set Out2?
FILTER1=0 ↑ BUFF SIZE=30 ↓↑ *ALT=0FT ↑ OUT2 TYPE=TEMP↓ 3

OUT2=0-10V ↓
Set the number of flow In addition, “SW2” must be set

Adjust dampening filter value Set the altitude for flow correction Sets OUT2 to produce
calculations to be averaged: to the VDC position to change
from 0 (OFF) to 99%. from 0 to 18,000 ft. Temperature output.
1 to 1,000. airflow output to 0–10VDC.
OUT2 TYPE=ALRM ↑ 3
OUT2=0-5V ↓↑
In addition, “SW2” must be set

Sets OUT2 to produce to the VDC position to change
Alarm output. airflow output to 0–5VDC.
3
OUT2=4-20mA ↑
In addition, “SW2” must be set to

the mA position to change airflow
output to 4–20mA.

Daikin Applied Training and Development
Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin equipment, its care should be a high
priority. For training information on all Daikin HVAC products, please visit us at www.DaikinApplied.com
and click on Training, or call 540-248-9646 and ask for the Training Department.
Warranty
All Daikin equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including Limited
Product Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Applied representative for warranty details. To find your
local Daikin Applied representative, go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Aftermarket Services
To find your local parts office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-37PARTS (800-377-2787).
To find your local service office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-432-1342.
This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-date
product information, please go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Products manufactured in an ISO Certified Facility.
IM 1125-7 (11/15) ©2015 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com

Dps 005

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dps 005

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and Maintenance Manual

Rebel™ Commercial Packaged

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ECM Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Unit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS 2 www.DaikinApplied.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

General Information Unit Nameplate

Table 1: Program Specific Unit Operation Literature

Nomenclature (DPS 003–028)

Daikin Packaged System Line voltage

Design vintage Unit style

www.DaikinApplied.com 3 IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Installer Responsibilities Service Clearance

Receiving Inspection Ventilation Clearance

Unit(s) Surrounded by Solid Walls:

IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS 4 www.DaikinApplied.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Figure 1: Service Clearances

Small Cabinet Medium Cabinet

Outdoor Air Outdoor Air

60 .00 36 .00 60 .00 36 .00

www.DaikinApplied.com 5 IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Overhead Clearance Roof Curb Assembly and Installation

IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS 6 www.DaikinApplied.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Figure 2: Roof Curb Assembly (DPS 003—006)1

NOTE: 1. Check submittal drawing for gas/water/electrical/supply/return air opening

Unit Tag: Units: Sheet: __ of __

Unit Tag: Units: Sheet: __ of __

47 .05 Supply 28 .55

Curb Detail 28 .69 9 .69

www.DaikinApplied.com 7 IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Figure 3: Roof Curb Assembly (DPS 007–015)1

DPS 007–012 Roofcurb with ERW Certified Drawing

NOTE: 1. Check submittal drawing for gas/water/electrical/supply/return air opening

IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS 8 www.DaikinApplied.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Figure 4: Roof Curb Assembly (DPS 016–028)1

NOTE: 1. Check submittal drawing for gas/water/electrical/supply/return air opening

www.DaikinApplied.com 9 IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rigging and Handling

Lifting points may not be symmetrical to the center

CAUTION USE SPREADER BAR

Unit is equipped with fork slot reenforcement pieces.

IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS 10 www.DaikinApplied.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Table 2: Physical Data—Unit Weights DPS 003 through 028

Large Cabinet Size 3–15 Fan Weights (lbs.)

www.DaikinApplied.com 11 IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Unit Piping - Condensate Drain Connection Damper Assemblies

Figure 7: Condensate Drain Connection

Outdoor Air Dampers (0% to 30%)

IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS 12 www.DaikinApplied.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cabinet Weather Protection Installing Duct Static Pressure Sensor Taps

www.DaikinApplied.com 13 IM 1125-7 • REBEL ROOFTOPS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Unit Tag: Units: Sheet: of

Unit Tag: Units: Sheet: of